INSTRUCTION MANUAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY GRD110-xxxD

Transcription

INSTRUCTION MANUAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY GRD110-xxxD

6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY
GRD110-xxxD
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2010
All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 0.1)
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRD110. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or
serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or
serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
⎯ 1 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
DANGER
•
Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING
•
Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
•
Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•
Fiber optic
When connecting this equipment via an optical fiber, do not look directly at the optical signal.
CAUTION
•
Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•
Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•
Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
•
Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•
External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•
Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
⎯ 2 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
•
Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•
Disposal
This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing
of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If
any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.
•
Plastics material
This product contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins
⎯ 3 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Contents
Safety Precautions
1
1.
Introduction
8
2.
Application Notes
11
2.1
11
11
14
15
17
22
26
34
34
36
39
42
45
49
49
50
53
55
55
55
57
57
57
58
58
59
59
63
64
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
3.
Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection
2.1.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
2.1.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
2.1.3 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
2.1.4 Scheme Logic
2.1.5 Setting for OC and EF protection
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
Phase Undercurrent Protection
2.1.3 Phase Undercurrent Protection
Thermal Overload Protection
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
Broken Conductor Protection
Breaker Failure Protection
Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush
2.8.1 Inrush Current Detector
2.8.2 Cold Load Protection
Trip Signal Output
Application of Protection Inhibits
2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection
2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection
CT Requirements
2.12.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection
2.12.2 Minimum Knee Point Voltage
2.12.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
2.12.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
Autoreclose
2.13.1 Scheme Logic
2.13.2 Sequence Coordination
2.13.3 Setting
Technical Description
67
3.1
67
67
71
71
71
72
74
75
3.2
3.3
Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
Input and Output Signals
3.2.1 AC Input Signals
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
Automatic Supervision
⎯ 4 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.4
3.5
4.
User Interface
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
5.
6.
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
3.3.5 PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring
3.3.6 IEC61850 Communication Monitoring
3.3.7 Failure Alarms
3.3.8 Trip Blocking
3.3.9 Setting
Recording Function
3.4.1 Fault Recording
3.4.2 Event Recording
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Metering Function
75
75
76
76
78
78
78
79
79
80
80
81
81
83
84
Outline of User Interface
4.1.1 Front Panel
4.1.2 Communication Ports
Operation of the User Interface
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
4.2.2 Relay Menu
4.2.3 Displaying Records
4.2.4 Displaying the Status
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
4.2.7 Testing
Personal Computer Interface
Relay Setting and Monitoring System
IEC 60870-5-103 Interface
IEC 61850 Communication
Clock Function
84
84
86
87
87
90
92
96
100
101
135
138
138
139
139
140
Installation
141
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Receipt of Relays
Relay Mounting
Electrostatic Discharge
Handling Precautions
External Connections
141
141
141
141
142
Commissioning and Maintenance
143
6.1
6.2
143
144
144
144
145
146
6.3
6.4
Outline of Commissioning Tests
Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
6.2.2 Precautions for Testing
Preparations
Hardware Tests
⎯ 5 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.5
6.6
6.6
6.7
7.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
Function Test
6.5.1 Measuring Element
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test
Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test
Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
6.7.5 Storage
Putting Relay into Service
146
146
147
148
149
149
155
155
156
156
156
158
158
158
160
160
160
161
162
162
163
⎯ 6 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix A Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal
Model to IEC60255-8
165
Appendix B Signal List
169
Appendix C Event Record Items
205
Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List
209
Appendix E Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation
211
Appendix F Case Outline
225
Appendix G Typical External Connection
227
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet
235
Appendix I
267
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
Appendix J Return Repair Form
271
Appendix K Technical Data
277
Appendix L Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
283
Appendix M IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
287
Appendix N IEC61850: MICS & PICS
297
Appendix O Inverse Time Characteristics
333
Appendix P Ordering
339
The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.0.0)
⎯ 7 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
1. Introduction
GRD110 series relays provide non-directional overcurrent protection for radial distribution
networks, and back-up protection for transmission and distribution networks.
Note: GRD110 series relays are non-directional, and are applicable to systems where a fault current
flows in a fixed direction, or flows in both directions but there is a significant difference in
magnitude. In systems where a fault current flows in both directions and there is not a significant
difference in the magnitude of the fault current, the directional overcurrent protection provided
by GRD110 facilitates fault selectivity.
The GRD110 series has three models and provides the following protection schemes in all models.
• Overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults with definite time or inverse time
characteristics
• Instantaneous overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults
The GRD110 series provides the following protection schemes depending on the models.
• Sensitive earth fault protection
• Undercurrent protection
• Thermal overload protection
• Negative phase sequence overcurrent protection
• Broken conductor detection
• Circuit breaker failure protection
• Cold load pick-up feature
• Blocked overcurrent and blocked busbar protection
The GRD110 series provides the following functions for all models.
• Eight settings groups
• Configurable binary inputs and outputs
• Circuit breaker condition monitoring
• Trip circuit supervision
• Automatic self-supervision
• Menu-based HMI system
• Configurable LED indication
• Metering and recording functions
• Rear mounted serial communication interface RS485 or fibre optic port for RSM,
IEC60870-5-103 communication
• Front mounted RS232 serial port for local PC communication
• Ethernet LAN port for IEC61850 communication
⎯ 8 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
All models provide continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits
are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted RS232 port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485, fibre optic port or
Ethernet LAN port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay
settings, and to access data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data
communication with substation control and automation systems is supported according to the IEC
61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 standards.
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRD110 series and identifies the functions to be provided
by each member.
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
: Scheme switch [APPL] setting
Model Number
GRD110 110
400
420
3P
2P
1P
3P
2P
1P
3P + E(E(*))
2P + E
E
3P + E(*) + SE
2P + E + SE
E + SE
IDMT O/C (OC1, OC2)
9
9
9
9
DT O/C (OC1 – 4)
9
9
9
9
Instantaneous O/C (OC1 – 4)
9
9
9
9
Current input
E + SE
IDMT O/C (EF1, EF2)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
DT O/C (EF1 – 4)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Instantaneous O/C (EF1 – 4)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
SEF protection
9
9
9
9
Phase U/C
9
9
9
9
Thermal O/L
9
9
9
9
Negative sequence O/C NOC
9
9
Broken conductor protection
9
9
CBF protection
9
9
Cold load protection
9
9
9
9
Inrush Current Detector
9
9
9
9
Auto-reclose
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Trip circuit supervision
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Self supervision
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
CB state monitoring
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Trip counter alarm
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
∑Iy
alarm
9
9
CB operate time alarm
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Multiple settings groups
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Fault records
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Event records
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
⎯ 9 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Model Number
GRD110 110
400
420
3P
2P
1P
3P
2P
1P
Disturbance records
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
IEC60870-5-103 communication
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
IEC61850 communication
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
E: current from residual circuit
E(*): current (Io) calculated from three-phase current in relay internal
SE: current from core balance CT
3P: three-phase current
2P: two-phase current
IDMT: inverse definite minimum time
DT: definite time
O/C: overcurrent protection
OC∗: phase overcurrent element
EF∗: earth fault element
SEF: sensitive earth fault
U/C: undercurrent protection
O/L: overload protection
NOC: negative sequence overcurrent protection
CBF: circuit breaker failure
Note: When setting [APPL]=3P in Model 400, the zero-sequence current input used is changed E to
E(*) depending on the zero-sequence current level. Therefore, CT for phase currents and CT for
zero-sequence current must be applied to the same residual circuit.
If these CT ratio is different, [APPL]=2P or =1P, that is not required the change of the
zero-sequence current input, should be selected.
Model 110 provides normal earth fault protection and sensitive earth fault protection.
Model 400 provides three-phase or two-phase phase protection and earth fault protection or earth
fault protection depending on the scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Model 420 provides three-phase or two-phase phase protection and earth and sensitive earth
protection or earth and sensitive earth fault protection depending on the scheme switch [APPL]
setting.
⎯ 10 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2. Application Notes
2.1
Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection
GRD110 provides radial distribution network protection with phase fault and earth fault
overcurrent elements OC1, OC2, EF1 and EF2 for stage-1 and -2, which have selective inverse
time and definite time characteristics. The protection of local and downstream terminals is
coordinated with the current setting, time setting, or both.
2.1.1
Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
In a system for which the fault current is practically determined by the fault location, without
being substantially affected by changes in the power source impedance, it is advantageous to use
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. This protection provides
reasonably fast tripping, even at a terminal close to the power source where the most severe faults
can occur.
Where ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power source) is small compared with that of
the protected section ZL, there is an appreciable difference between the current for a fault at the far
end of the section (ES/(ZS+ZL), ES: source voltage), and the current for a fault at the near end
(ES/ZS). When operating time is inversely proportional to the current, the relay operates faster for
a fault at the end of the section nearer the power source, and the operating time ratio for a fault at
the near end to the far end is ZS/(ZS + ZL).
The resultant time-distance characteristics are shown in Figure 2.1.1 for radial networks with
several feeder sections. With the same selective time coordination margin TC as the download
section, the operating time can be further reduced by using a more inverse characteristic.
Operate time
TC
B
A
TC
C
Figure 2.1.1 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection
The OC1 and EF1 have the IDMT characteristics defined by equation (1) in accordance with IEC
60255-151:
⎧⎡
⎤ ⎫
k
⎪
⎥ + c⎪
t = TMS × ⎨⎢
α
⎢
⎥ ⎬
⎪⎢ I
− 1⎥ ⎪
⎦ ⎭
⎩⎣ Is
( )
(1)
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energising current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
⎯ 11 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.1.1. They are illustrated in Figure 2.1.2.
In addition to the above nine curve types, the OC1 and EF1 can provides user configurable IDMT
curve. If required, set the scheme switch [M∗∗∗] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, α
and c.
IEC/UK Inverse Curves
(Time Multiplier = 1)
IEEE/US Inverse Curves
1000
100
100
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
10
10
LTI
NI
1
1
MI
VI
VI
CO2
CO8
EI
EI
0.1
0.1
1
10
100
1
10
100
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristics
Programmable Reset Characteristics
OC1 and EF1 have a programmable reset feature: instantaneous, definite time delayed, or
dependent time delayed reset. (Refer to Appendix A for a more detailed description.)
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme.
The inverse reset characteristic is particularly useful for providing correct coordination with an
upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of
intermittent (‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions.
Definite time reset
The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating characteristics.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
⎯ 12 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Dependent time reset
The dependent time resetting characteristic is complied with IEC 60255-151 depending time reset
characteristic, and is defined by the following equation:
⎤
⎡
⎥
⎢
tr
⎥
t = RTMS × ⎢
β
⎢ ⎛I ⎞ ⎥
⎢⎣1 − ⎜⎝ I S ⎟⎠ ⎥⎦
(2)
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
tr(kr) = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is
zero (see Table 2.1.1),
RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.
β = constants defining curve.
Figure 2.1.3 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.
The dependent time reset characteristic also can provide user configurable IDMT curve. If
required, set the scheme switch [M∗∗∗] to “C” and set the curve defining constants kr and β. Table
2.1.1 shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves
Curve Type (IEC 60255-151)
Curve Description
k
α
c
tr
β
A
IEC Normal Inverse (NI)
0.14
0.02
0
-
-
B
IEC Very Inverse (VI)
13.5
1
0
-
-
C
IEC Extremely Inverse (EI)
80
2
0
-
-
-
UK Long Time Inverse (LTI)
120
1
0
-
-
D
IEEE Moderately Inverse (MI)
0.0515
0.02
0.114
4.85
2
E
IEEE Very Inverse (VI)
19.61
2
0.491
21.6
2
F
IEEE Extremely Inverse (EI)
28.2
2
0.1217
29.1
2
-
US CO8 Inverse
5.95
2
0.18
5.95
2
-
US CO2 Short Time Inverse
0.02394
0.02
0.01694
2.261
2
Note: tr and β are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2).
⎯ 13 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
The following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants. OC2 and EF2 for
stage-2 also provide the same inverse time protection as OC1 and EF1.
Curve defining constants
Range
Step
k
0.000 – 30.000
0.001
α
0.00 – 5.00
0.01
c
0.000 – 5.000
0.001
tr (kr)
0.000 – 30.000
0.001
β
0.00 – 5.00
0.01
IEEE Reset Curves
1000.00
Time (s)
100.00
EI
VI
10.00
CO8
MI
CO2
1.00
0.1
1
Figure 2.1.3 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics
2.1.2
Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal in relation to the position of the
fault, that is, the impedance between the relay and the power source is large, the advantages of the
IDMT characteristics are not fully utilised. In this case, definite time overcurrent protection is
applied. The operating time can be constant irrespective of the magnitude of the fault current.
The definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent measuring elements
OC1 and EF1 and delayed pick-up timers started by the elements, and provides selective
protection with graded setting of the delayed pick-up timers. Thus, the constant time coordination
with the downstream section can be maintained as shown in Figure 2.1.4 As is clear in the figure,
the nearer to the power source a section is, the greater the delay in the tripping time of the section.
This is undesirable particularly where there are many sections in the series.
⎯ 14 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Operate time
TC
TC
A
B
C
Figure 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
2.1.3
Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
In conjunction with inverse time overcurrent protection, definite time overcurrent elements OC2
to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 provide instantaneous overcurrent protection. OC2 and EF2 also provide
the same inverse time protection as OC1 and EF1.
OC2 to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 are phase fault and earth fault protection elements, respectively. Each
element is programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation. The phase fault
elements operate on a phase segregated basis, although tripping is for three phase only.
2.1.3.1
Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
When they are applied to radial networks with several feeder sections where ZL (impedance of the
protected line) is large enough compared with ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power
source), and the magnitude of the fault current in the local end fault is much greater (3 times or
more, or (ZL+ZS)/ZS≧3, for example) than that in the remote end fault under the condition that
ZS is maximum, the pick-up current can be set sufficiently high so that the operating zone of the
elements do not reach the remote end of the feeder, and thus instantaneous and selective protection
can be applied.
This high setting overcurrent protection is applicable and effective particularly for feeders near the
power source where the setting is feasible, but the longest tripping times would otherwise have to
be accepted.
As long as the associated inverse time overcurrent protection is correctly coordinated, the
instantaneous protection does not require setting coordination with the downstream section.
Figure 2.1.5 shows operating times for instantaneous overcurrent protection in conjunction with
inverse time overcurrent protection. The shaded area shows the reduction in operating time by
applying the instantaneous overcurrent protection. The instantaneous protection zone decreases as
ZS increases.
Operate time
TC
A
B
TC
C
Figure 2.1.5 Conjunction of Inverse and Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
⎯ 15 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
The current setting is set 1.3 to 1.5 times higher than the probable maximum fault current in the
event of a fault at the remote end. The maximum fault current for elements OC2 to OC4 is
obtained in case of three-phase faults, while the maximum fault current for elements EF2 to EF4 is
obtained in the event of single phase earth faults.
2.1.3.2
Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
When applying inverse time overcurrent protection for a feeder system as shown in Figure 2.1.6,
well coordinated protection with the fuses in branch circuit faults and high-speed protection for
the feeder faults can be provided by adding staged definite time overcurrent protection with
time-graded OC2 and OC3 or EF2 and EF3 elements.
Fuse
GRD110
Figure 2.1.6 Feeder Protection Coordinated with Fuses
Configuring the inverse time element OC1 (and EF1) and time graded elements OC2 and OC3 (or
EF2 and EF3) as shown in Figure 2.1.7, the characteristic of overcurrent protection can be
improved to coordinate with the fuse characteristic.
Time (s)
OC1
OC2
OC3
Fuse
Current (amps)
Figure 2.1.7 Staged Definite Time Protection
⎯ 16 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.1.4
Scheme Logic
2.1.4.1 Phase overcurrent protection
Figures 2.1.7 to 2.1.10 show the scheme logic of the non-directional and directional phase
overcurrent protection OC1 to OC4.
Note:
For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix L.
OC1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure
2.1.7. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] to “DT” and trip signal OC1
TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOC1. The inverse time protection is selected by
setting [MOC1] to any one of “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “CON” and then setting [MOC1C]
according to the required IDMT characteristic, and trip signal OC1_TRIP is given. If
instantaneous tripping is required, signal OC∗_INST_TP is assigned using the PLC function.
The OC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.8. The scheme logic of OC2 is the same as that of the OC1.
Figure 2.1.9 and Figure 2.1.10 show the scheme logic of the definite time phase overcurrent
protection OC3 and OC4. The OC3 and OC4 give trip and alarm signals OC3_TRIP and
OC4_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOC3 and TOC4 respectively.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the OC1 to OC4 protection with the scheme switches
[OC1-2F] to [OC4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.8.1.
The trip mode of OC1 TRIP to OC4 ALARM can be selected by setting [OCTP] to “3POR”(any
one of 3 phases) or “2OUTOF3”(2 out of 3 phases) gate. With “2OUTOF3” selected, the trip
signal is not issued during a single-phase fault. The switch [OCTP] is common for OC1 to OC4
protection.
The OC1 to OC4 protection provide the delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or
delayed trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in
multi-shot reclosing (see Section 2.13.). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip)
and reclose initiating (ARC) is executed:
Trip (1st) → ARC (1st) → Trip (2nd) → ARC (2nd) → Trip (3rd) → ARC (3rd) → Trip (4th) →
ARC (4th) → Trip (5th) → ARC (5th) → Trip (6th)
Each tripping is selected by setting [OC∗-TP∗] to any one of “Inst”(instantaneous trip),
“Set”(delayed trip by TOC∗ and [MOC1] setting) or “Off”(blocked).
The OC1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.11.
The OC1 to OC4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] to [OC4EN] or the
PLC signals OC1_BLOCK to OC4_BLOCK respectively.
⎯ 17 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
TOC1
51
A
≥1
52
0
t
&
&
OC1 B
≥1
53
C
≥1
[OC1-2F]
+
104
101
93
≥1
&
A
94
OC1
B
(INST)
C
OC1_TRIP
&
≥1
&
&
≥1
&
95
&
&
≥1
1696 OC1_INST_TP
&
&
"3POR"
[OCTP]
&
OC1-INST
≥1
+
3POR
2OUTOF3
"2OUTOF3"
&
[MOC1]
+
OC1-C_TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
"Block" &
ICD
OC1-B_TRIP
≥1
0
t
&
&
OC1-A_TRIP
103
0
t
&
&
102
≥1
Delayed trip control:
"IEC"
SHOT NUM1
[OC1-EN]
+ "ON"
"IEEE"
From Figure
2.5.1.
OC1 ON
"US"
•
•
•
•
"DT"
88
A
89
OC1HS B
90
C
[OC1-TP6]
+
OC1-B HS
OC1 ON
&
OC1 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection
TOC2
54
≥1
55
&
0
t
&
OC2 B
≥1
56
C
1
OC1-C HS
Figure 2.1.7
A
≥1
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
OC1-A HS
OC1-INST
OC1 OFF
&
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
[OC1-TP1]
+ •
≥1
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
"CON"
1536 OC1_BLOCK
&
•
•
•
•
≥1
[OC2-2F]
&
&
+ "Block"
&
≥1
108
0
t
&
107
0
t
&
106
≥1
≥1
OC2-A_TRIP
OC2-B_TRIP
OC2-C_TRIP
105
0.00 - 300.00s
OC2_TRIP
ICD
153
OC2
B
(INST)
C
≥1
&
A
154
≥1
&
&
&
155
&
&
OC2-INST
1697 OC2_INST_TP
≥1
"IEC"
+
"IEEE"
"US"
OC2 ON
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
[OC2-TP1]
+ •
"CON"
"DT"
•
•
•
1
[OC2-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.8
&
"3POR"
3POR
2OUTOF3
"2OUTOF3"
SHOT NUM1
[OC2-EN]
+ "ON"
1537 OC2_BLOCK
[OCTP]
≥1
&
≥1
&
&
[MOC2]
+
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
&
•
•
•
•
OC2 OFF
≥1
&
OC2 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection
⎯ 18 ⎯
OC2-INST
1
OC2 ON
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
TOC3
57
A
&
OC3 B
58
C
59
&
&
[OC3-2F]
t
0
t
0
t
0
110
≥1
111
≥1
112
≥1
OC3-A_TRIP
OC3-B_TRIP
OC3-C_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
109
ICD
≥1
[OC3-EN]
+ "ON"
OC3 ON
&
1
&
[OCTP]
≥1
+
SHOT NUM1
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
&
•
•
•
•
62
&
&
[OC4-2F]
OC3 ON
1
&
t
0
t
0
t
0
114
≥1
115
≥1
116
≥1
OC4-A_ALARM
OC4-B_ALARM
OC4-C_ALARM
113
ICD
≥1
[OC4-EN]
+ "ON"
OC4 ON
&
1
[OCTP]
&
+
SHOT NUM1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
[OC4-TP1]
+ •
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[OC4-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.10
≥1
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
"3POR"
3POR
"2OUTOF3"
From Figure
2.5.1.
≥1
&
≥1
1699 OC4_INST_TP
&
OC4_ALARM
&
&
&
OC4-INST
≥1
•
•
•
•
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
1539 OC4_BLOCK
OC3-INST
TOC4
&
C
2OUTOF3
OC3 Definite Time Phase Overcurrent Protection
60
A
OC4 B
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
[OC3-TP6]
+
3POR
OC3 OFF
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"3POR"
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
[OC3-TP1]
+ •
61
&
≥1
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
Figure 2.1.9
≥1
"2OUTOF3"
1698 OC3_INST_TP
≥1
&
&
OC3-INST
&
&
&
1538 OC3_BLOCK
OC3_TRIP
&
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
OC4-INST
OC3 OFF
&
•
•
•
•
≥1
1
&
OC4 Definite Time Phase Overcurrent Protection
⎯ 19 ⎯
2OUTOF3
OC4 ON
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.1.4.2
Earth fault protection
Figure 2.1.11 to Figure 2.1.14 show the scheme logic for the non-directional and directional earth
fault protection EF1 to EF4.
The EF1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.11. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MEF1] to “DT”, and the trip
signal EF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TEF1. The inverse time protection is
selected by setting [MEF1] to any one of “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “CON” and then setting
[MEF1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic, and the trip signal EF1_TRIP is given. If
instantaneous tripping is required, the signal EF∗_INST_TP is assigned using the PLC function.
The EF2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.1.12. The scheme logic of EF2 is the same as that of the EF1.
Figure 2.1.13 and Figure 2.1.14 show the scheme logic of the definite time earth fault protection
EF3 and EF4. The EF3 and EF4 give trip and alarm signals EF3_TRIP and EF4_ALARM through
the delayed pick-up timers TEF3 and TEF4 respectively.
transformer energisation, and can block the EF1 to EF4 protection by the scheme switches
[EF1-2F] to [EF4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.8.1.
The EF1 to EF4 protection provide the delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or delayed
trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in multi-shot
reclosing (see Section 2.13). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip) and reclose
initiating (ARC) is executed:
Each tripping is selected by setting [EF∗-TP∗] to any one of “Inst”(instantaneous trip),
“Set”(delayed trip by TEF∗ and [MEF1] setting) or “Off”(blocked).
EF1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.11.
The EF1 to EF4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [EF1EN] to [EF4EN] or the
PLC signals EF1_BLOCK to EF4_BLOCK respectively.
EF1
63
TEF1
≥1
&
&
[EF1-2F]
+
ICD
117
≥1
EF1_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
"Block" &
EF1
(INST)
96
&
&
EF1-INST
1700 EF1_INST_TP
≥1
≥1
SHOT NUM1
[MEF1]
+
0
t
"IEC"
[EF1-EN]
+ "ON"
"IEEE"
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
SHOT NUM6
"US"
[EF1-TP1]
+ •
"CON"
•
•
•
"DT"
1544 EF1_BLOCK
EF1HS
91
•
•
•
•
1
[EF1-TP6]
+
EF1_HS
Figure 2.1.11
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
&
&
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
•
&
EF1 Earth Fault Protection
⎯ 20 ⎯
≥1
•
•
•
•
EF1-INST
EF1 OFF
≥1
1
EF1 ON
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
64
EF2
TEF2
≥1
&
[EF2-2F]
+
ICD
0
t
&
118
≥1
EF2_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
"Block" &
EF2
(INST)
156
&
&
EF2-INST
1701 EF2_INST_TP
≥1
SHOT NUM1
[MEF2]
+
≥1
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
"IEC"
[EF2-EN]
+ "ON"
"IEEE"
"US"
"CON"
[EF2-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.12
EF3
1
EF2 ON
&
EF2 Earth Fault Protection
TEF3
65
0
t
&
[EF3-2F]
119
≥1
EF3_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
&
ICD
[EF3-EN]
+ "ON"
EF3-INST
SHOT NUM1
1546 EF3_BLOCK
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
≥1
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
1702 EF3_INST_TP
1
[EF3-TP1]
+ •
Figure 2.1.13
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
[EF3-TP6]
+
&
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
EF4
≥1
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
EF2-INST
EF2 OFF
&
•
•
•
•
"DT"
1
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
≥1
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
[EF2-TP1]
+ •
1545 EF2_BLOCK
&
•
•
•
•
EF3-INST
EF3 OFF
≥1
1
EF3 ON
&
EF3 Definite Time Earth Fault Protection
TEF4
66
t
&
[EF4-2F]
0
120
≥1
EF4_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block"
&
&
ICD
[EF4-EN]
+ "ON"
EF4-INST
SHOT NUM1
≥1
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
1703 EF4_INST_TP
1547 EF4_BLOCK
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
1
[EF4-TP1]
+ •
•
•
•
[EF4-TP6]
+
Figure 2.1.14
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
&
•
•
•
•
EF4 OFF
≥1
&
EF4 Definite Time Earth Fault Protection
⎯ 21 ⎯
EF4-INST
1
EF4 ON
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.1.5
Setting for OC and EF protection
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection
and their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OC1
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
5.0 A
(1.00 A)
OC1 threshold setting
TOC1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OC1 definite time setting. Required if
[MOC1] = DT.
TOC1M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC1 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MOC1] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TOC1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[OC1R] = DEF.
TOC1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [OC1R] = DEP.
OC2
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
25.0 A
(5.00 A)
TOC2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OC2 definite time setting. Required if
[MOC2] = DT.
TOC2M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MOC2] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TOC2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
OC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[OC2R] = DEF.
TOC2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
OC1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [OC2R] = DEP.
OC3
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
50.0 A
(10.00 A)
TOC3
0.00 – 300.0 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OC3 definite time setting
OC4
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
100.0 A
(20.00 A)
TOC4
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
OC4 definite time setting
EF1
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
1.5 A
(0.30 A)
EF1 threshold setting
TEF1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
EF1 definite time setting. Required if [MEF1]
= DT.
TEF1M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF1 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MEF1] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TEF1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
EF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[EF1R] = DEF.
TEF1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [EF1R] = DEP.
EF2
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
15.0 A
(3.00 A)
TEF2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
EF2 definite time setting. Required if [MEF2]
= DT.
TEF2M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MEF2] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TEF2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
EF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[EF2R] = DEF.
⎯ 22 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
TEF2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
EF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [EF2R] = DEP.
EF3
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
25.0 A
(5.00 A)
TEF3
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
EF3 definite time setting
EF4
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
50.0 A
(10.00 A)
TEF4
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
EF4 definite time setting
[OC1EN]
Off / On
On
OC1 Enable
[MOC1]
DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON
DT
OC1 time characteristic
[MOC1C]
MOC1C-IEC
MOC1C-IEEE
MOC1C-US
OC1 inverse curve type.
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MOC1] = IEC.
Required if [MOC1] = IEEE.
Required if [MOC1] = US.
[OC1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
OC1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MOC1] = IEEE or US.
[OC2EN]
Off / On
Off
OC2 Enable
[OC2-DIR]
FWD/REV/NON
FWD
OC2 directional characteristic
[MOC2]
DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON
DT
OC2 time characteristic
[MOC2C]
MOC2C-IEC
MOC2C-IEEE
MOC2C-US
OC2 inverse curve type.
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MOC2] = IEC.
Required if [MOC2] = IEEE.
Required if [MOC2] = US.
[OC2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
OC2 reset characteristic. Required if
[MOC2] = IEEE or US.
[OC3EN]
Off / On
Off
OC3 Enable
[OC4EN]
Off / On
Off
OC4 Enable
[OCTP]
3POR / 2OUTOF3
3POR
OC trip mode
[EF1EN]
Off / On
On
EF1 Enable
[MEF1]
DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON
DT
EF1 time characteristic
[MEF1C]
MEF1C-IEC
MEF1C-IEEE
MEF1C-US
EF1 inverse curve type.
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MEF1] = IEC.
Required if [MEF1] = IEEE.
Required if [MEF1] = US.
[EF1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
EF1 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF1]
= IEEE or US.
[EF2EN]
Off / On / POP
Off
EF2 Enable
[MEF2]
DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON
DT
EF2 time characteristic
[MEF2C]
MEF2C-IEC
MEF2C-IEEE
MEF2C-US
EF2 inverse curve type.
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MEF2] = IEC.
Required if [MEF2] = IEEE.
Required if [MEF2] = US.
[EF2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
EF2 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF2]
= IEEE or US.
[EF3EN]
Off / On
Off
EF3 Enable
[EF4EN]
Off / On
Off
EF4 Enable
⎯ 23 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of a 5 A rating.
2.1.5.1
Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
Current setting
In Figure 2.1.15, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in the
event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a fault
on the next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at
remote end F3.
To calculate the minimum fault current, phase-to-phase faults are assumed for the phase
overcurrent element, and phase to earth faults for the residual overcurrent element, assuming the
probable maximum source impedance. When considering the fault at F3, the remote end of the
next section is assumed to be open.
The higher the current setting, the more effective the inverse characteristic. On the other hand, the
lower the setting, the more dependable the operation. The setting is normally 1 to 1.5 times or less
of the minimum fault current.
For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is set to the lowest
value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not
operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the
current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines.
A
B
F1
Figure 2.1.15
C
F2
F3
Current Settings in Radial Feeder
Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to relays on adjacent feeders. Consider
the minimum source impedance when the current flowing through the relay reaches a maximum.
In Figure 2.1.15, in the event of a fault at F2, the operating time is set so that terminal A may
operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in the relays may sometimes be
greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time, time coordination must also
be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for
the small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a
fault at point F2 in Figure 2.1.15.
Tc = T1 + T2 + Tm
where,
T1: circuit breaker clearance time at B
T2: relay reset time at A
Tm: time margin
⎯ 24 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.1.5.2
Settings for Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
Current setting
The current setting is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at the remote
end of the protected feeder section. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a
fault in a next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current, in the event of a fault
at the remote end of the next feeder section.
Identical current values can be set for terminals, but graded settings are better than identical
settings, in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The farther from the power source the
terminal is located, the higher the sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) that is required.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not
operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the
current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines. Taking the
selection of instantaneous operation into consideration, the settings must be high enough not to
operate for large motor starting currents or transformer inrush currents.
Time setting
When setting the delayed pick-up timers, the time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way
as explained in “Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection”.
⎯ 25 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.2
The sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is applied for distribution systems earthed through high
impedance, where very low levels of fault current are expected for earth faults. Furthermore, the
SEF elements of GRD110 are also applicable to the “standby earth fault protection” and the “high
impedance restricted earth fault protection of transformers”.
GRD110 provides earth fault protection with more sensitive settings for use in applications where
the fault current magnitude may be very low. A 4-stage directional overcurrent function is
provided, with the first stage programmable for inverse time or definite time operation. The
second, third and fourth stages provide definite time operation.
The sensitive earth fault element includes a digital filter which rejects all harmonics other than the
fundamental power system frequency.
The sensitive earth fault quantity is measured directly, using a dedicated core balance earth fault
CT.
This input can also be used in transformer restricted earth fault applications, by the use of external
metrosils (varistors) and setting resistors.
The SEF elements provide 20 times more sensitive setting ranges (10 mA to 1 A in 5A rating) than
the regular earth fault protection.
Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of unwanted operation
due to harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore
the SEF elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.
The SEF protection is provided in Model 110 and 420 series which have a dedicated earth fault
input circuit.
The element SEF1 provides inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent
protection. Stage 2 of the two-stage overcurrent protection is used only for the standby earth fault
protection. The SEF2 to SEF4 provide definite time overcurrent protection.
When SEF employs IEEE or USA inverse time characteristics, two reset modes are available:
definite time or dependent time resetting. If the IEC inverse time characteristic is employed,
definite time resetting is provided. For other characteristics, refer to Section 2.1.1.
In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is
sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.
The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current
during normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.
The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three
phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error in phase faults. Transient
false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.
Standby earth fault protection
The SEF is energised from a CT connected in the power transformer low voltage neutral, and the
standby earth fault protection trips the transformer to backup the low voltage feeder protection,
and ensures that the neutral earthing resistor is not loaded beyond its rating. Stage 1 trips the
transformer low voltage circuit breaker, then stage 2 trips the high voltage circuit breaker(s) with a
time delay after stage 1 operates.
The time graded tripping is valid for transformers connected to a ring bus, banked transformers
and feeder transformers.
⎯ 26 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Restricted earth fault protection
The SEF elements can be applied in a high impedance restricted earth fault scheme (REF), for
protection of a star-connected transformer winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through
impedance.
As shown in Figure 2.2.1, the differential current between the residual current derived from the
three-phase feeder currents and the neutral current in the neutral conductor is introduced into the
SEF elements. Two external components, a stabilising resistor and a varistor, are connected as
shown in the figure. The former increases the overall impedance of the relay circuit and stabilises
the differential voltage, and the latter suppresses any overvoltage in the differential circuit.
F
Power
Transformer
Varistor
GRD110
SEF input
Stabilising
Resistor
Figure 2.2.1
High Impedance REF
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.2.2 to 2.2.5 show the scheme logic for the sensitive earth fault protection.
Figure 2.2.2 shows the scheme logic of sensitive earth fault protection SEF1 with inverse time or
definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite time protection is selected by
setting [MSE1] to “DT”. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth fault protection and
stage 1 trip signal SEF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE1. The inverse time
protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to either “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “CON” and then setting
[MEF1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic. The element SEF1 is enabled and stage 1
trip signal SEF1_TRIP is given.
Both protections provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TSE12.
When the standby earth fault protection is applied by introducing earth current from the
transformer low voltage neutral circuit, stage 1 trip signals are used to trip the transformer low
voltage circuit breaker. If SEF1 continues operating after stage 1 has operated, the stage 2 trip
signal can be used to trip the transformer high voltage circuit breaker(s).
SEF1HS (high speed) element is used for blocked overcurrent protection. See Section 2.11.
The SEF2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.2.3. The scheme logic of SEF2 is the same as that of SEF1 except for SEF1-S2_TRIP.
Figure 2.2.4 and Figure 2.2.5 show the scheme logic of the definite time sensitive earth fault
protection SEF3 and SEF4. SEF3 and SEF4 give trip and alarm signals SEF3_TRIP and
SEF4_ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TSE3 and TSE4 respectively.
transformer energisation, and can block the SEF1 to SEF4 protection by the scheme switches
⎯ 27 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
[SE1-2F] to [SE4-2F] respectively. See Section 2.8.1.
The SEF1 to SEF4 protection provide the delayed trip control function (instantaneous trip or
delayed trip) according to the trip shot number for a fault such as a reclose-on-to-fault in
multi-shot reclosing (see Section 2.13). If a permanent fault occurs, the following tripping (Trip)
and reclose initiating (ARC) is executed:
Each tripping is selected by setting [SE∗-TP∗] to any one of “Inst”(instantaneous trip),
“Set”(delayed trip by TSE∗ and [MSE1] setting) or “Off”(blocked).
The SEF1 to SEF4 protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [SE1EN] to [SE4EN] or
PLC signals SEF1_BLOCK to SEF4_BLOCK. The SEF1 stage 2 trip of standby earth fault
protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [SE1S2].
SEF1
≥1
&
& 0.00 - 300.00s
[SE1-2F]
[SE1EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
SEF1
INST
121
SEF1-S1_TRIP
&
&
[SE1S2]
+
≥1
≥1
1704 SEF1_INST_TP
&
"ON"
122
SEF1-S2_ TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
SHOT NUM1
•
•
•
•
"IEC"
From Figure
2.5.1.
"IEEE"
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
"US"
[SE1-TP1]
+ •
"CON"
"DT"
1552 SEF1_BLOCK
92
TSE12
0
t
[MSE1]
SEF1HS
≥1
97
SEF1-INST
+
TSE1
0
t
67
1
SEF1_HS
Figure 2.2.2
•
•
•
[SE1-TP6]
+
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
&
•
•
•
•
SEF1-INST
SE1 OFF
≥1
1
&
SEF1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic
⎯ 28 ⎯
SEF1 ON
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
TSE2
0
t
68
SEF2
≥1
&
& 0.00 - 300.00s
[SE2-2F]
[SE2EN]
+
"ON"
+ "Block"
&
ICD
≥1
123
SEF2_TRIP
&
157
SEF2
INST
&
SEF2-INST
≥1
≥1
SHOT NUM1
•
•
•
•
1705 SEF2_INST_TP
From Figure
2.5.1.
[MSE2]
+
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
"IEC"
"IEEE"
[SE2-TP1]
+ •
"US"
"CON"
"DT"
[SE2-TP6]
+
1
1553 SEF2_BLOCK
Figure 2.2.3
SEF3
+ "Block"
&
ICD
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
SEF2-INST
SE2 OFF
≥1
1
SEF2 ON
&
TSE3
t
0
&
[SE3EN]
+
"ON"
SEF3-INST
&
•
•
•
•
69
[SE3-2F]
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
&
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
124
SEF3 TRIP
&
≥1
1706 SEF3_INST_TP
1554 SEF3_BLOCK
SHOT NUM1
1
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
[SE3-TP1]
+ •
•
•
•
[SE3-TP6]
+
Figure 2.2.4
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
•
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
&
•
•
•
•
SEF3-INST
SE3 OFF
≥1
1
&
⎯ 29 ⎯
SEF3 ON
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
SEF4
TSE4
t
0
70
&
[SE4EN]
+
"ON"
[SE4-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
SEF4-INST
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
125
SEF4 _ALARM
&
≥1
1707 SEF4_INST_TP
1555 SEF4_BLOCK
SHOT NUM1
•
•
•
•
From Figure
2.5.1.
1
•
•
•
•
SHOT NUM6
[SE4-TP1]
+ •
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[SE4-TP6]
+
Figure 2.2.5
"Inst"
"Set"
"OFF"
&
≥1
•
•
•
•
&
&
•
•
•
•
SEF4-INST
SE3 OFF
≥1
1
SEF4 ON
&
SEF4 Sensitive Definite Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and
their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
SE1
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.05 A
(0.010 A)
SEF1 threshold setting
TSE1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE1] = DT.
TSE1M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting.
Required if [MSE1] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TSE1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MSE1] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP.
TSE12
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting
SE2
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.05 A
(0.010 A)
TSE2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF2 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE2] = DT.
TSE2M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting.
Required if [MSE2] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TSE2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MSE2] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
SEF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE2R] = DEP.
SE3
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.05 A
(0.010 A)
TSE3
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF3 definite time setting.
SE4
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.05 A
(0.010 A)
⎯ 30 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
TSE4
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
SEF4 definite time setting.
[SE1EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF1 Enable
[MSE1]
DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON
DT
SEF1 characteristic
[MSE1C]
MSE1C-IEC
MSE1C-IEEE
MSE1C-US
SEF1 inverse curve type.
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MSE1] = IEC.
Required if [MSE1] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE1] = US.
[SE1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE1] = IEEE or US.
[SE1S2]
Off / On
Off
SEF1 stage 2 timer enable
[SE2EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF2 Enable
[MSE2]
DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON
DT
SEF2 characteristic
[MSE2C]
MSE2C-IEC
MSE2C-IEEE
MSE2C-US
SEF2 inverse curve type.
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MSE2] = IEC.
Required if [MSE2] = IEEE.
Required if [MSE2] = US.
[SE2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
SEF2 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE2] = IEEE or US.
[SE3EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF3 Enable
[SE4EN]
Off / On
Off
SEF4 Enable
(*) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in the
case of a 5 A rating.
SEF
SEF is set lower than the available earth fault current and higher than the erroneous zero-phase
current. The erroneous zero-phase current exists under normal conditions due to the unbalanced
feeder configuration. The zero-phase current is normally fed from a core balance CT on the feeder,
but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error
during phase faults.
The erroneous steady state zero-phase current can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay
front panel.
High impedance REF protection
CT saturation under through fault conditions results in voltage appearing across the relay circuit.
The voltage setting of the relay circuit must be arranged such that it is greater than the maximum
voltage that can occur under through fault conditions. The worst case is considered whereby one
CT of the balancing group becomes completely saturated, while the others maintain linear
operation. The excitation impedance of the saturated CT is considered to approximate a
short-circuit.
⎯ 31 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Saturated CT
Healthy CT
Transformer
Circuit
IF
Varistor
ZM≈0
RCT
VS
RS
Figure 2.2.6
Stabilising
Resistor
GRD140
RL
Maximum Voltage under Through Fault Condition
The voltage across the relay circuit under these conditions is given by the equation:
VS = IF×(RCT + RL)
where:
VS = critical setting voltage (rms)
IF = maximum prospective secondary through fault current (rms)
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
RL = Lead resistance (total resistance of the loop from the saturated CT to the relaying
point)
A series stabilising resistor is used to raise the voltage setting of the relay circuit to VS. No safety
margin is needed since the extreme assumption of unbalanced CT saturation does not occur in
practice. The series resistor value, RS, is selected as follows:
RS = VS / IS
IS is the current setting (in secondary amps) applied to the GRD110 relay. However, the actual
fault setting of the scheme includes the total current flowing in all parallel paths. That is to say that
the actual primary current for operation, after being referred to the secondary circuit, is the sum of
the relay operating current, the current flowing in the varistor, and the excitation current of all the
parallel connected CTs at the setting voltage. In practice, the varistor current is normally small
enough that it can be neglected. Hence:
IS ≦ IP / N – 4Imag
where:
IS = setting applied to GRD110 relay (secondary amps)
IP = minimum primary current for operation (earth fault sensitivity)
N = CT ratio
Imag = CT magnetising (excitation) current at voltage VS
More sensitive settings for IS allow for greater coverage of the transformer winding, but they also
require larger values of RS to ensure stability, and the increased impedance of the differential
circuit can result in high voltages being developed during internal faults. The peak voltage, Vpk,
developed may be approximated by the equation:
Vpk = 2× 2 × Vk × ( I F R S − Vk )
where:
Vk = CT knee point voltage
⎯ 32 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IF = maximum prospective secondary current for an internal fault
When a Metrosil is used for the varistor, it should be selected with the following characteristics:
V = CIβ
where:
V = instantaneous voltage
I = instantaneous current
β = constant, normally in the range 0.20 - 0.25
C = constant.
The C value defines the characteristics of the metrosil, and should be chosen according to the
following requirements:
1. The current through the metrosil at the relay voltage setting should be as low as possible,
preferably less than 30mA for a 1Amp CT and less than 100mA for a 5Amp CT.
2. The voltage at the maximum secondary current should be limited, preferably to 1500Vrms.
Restricted earth fault schemes should be applied with high accuracy CTs whose knee point voltage
Vk is chosen according to the equation:
Vk ≧ 2×VS
where VS is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
⎯ 33 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.3
2.1.3
The phase undercurrent protection is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load,
typically motor load. Two stage undercurrent protection UC1 and UC2 are available.
The undercurrent element operates for current falling through the threshold level. But the
operation is blocked when the current falls below 4 % of CT secondary rating to discriminate the
loss of load from the feeder tripping by other protection. Figure 2.3.1 shows the undercurrent
element characteristic.
Setting value
|I| ≤ UC1 setting
Operating zone
0.04×In
0
|I| ≤ UC2 setting
I
&
UC1
&
UC2
|I| ≥ 0.04×In
In: rated current
Figure 2.3.1
Undercurrent Element Characteristic
Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarming. The elements
are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The undercurrent element operates on a per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is threephase only.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.3.2 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.
The undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output UC1 TRIP and UC2 ALARM through delayed
pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.
This protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or PLC signals UC1
BLOCK and UC2 BLOCK.
⎯ 34 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
71
A
&
&
&
72
UC1 B
&
&
&
73
C
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
75
UC2 B
76
C
&
&
&
+
I≥
0.04In B
C
1568 UC1_BLOCK
1
1569 UC2_BLOCK
1
0
t
0
129
126
≥1
t
TUC2
0
131
t
0
132
0
133
t
0.00 - 300.00s
[UC2EN]
A
t
128
"ON"
74
A
127
0.00 - 300.00s
[UC1EN]
+
TUC1
0
t
130
≥1
UC1-A_TRIP
UC1-B_TRIP
UC1-C_TRIP
UC1_TRIP
UC2-A_ALARM
UC2-B_ALARM
UC2-C_ALARM
UC2_ALARM
"ON"
In : Rated current
Figure 2.3.2
Undercurrent Protection Scheme Logic
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
UC1
0.5 – 10.0 A
(0.10 – 2.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
1.0 A
(0.20 A)
UC1 threshold setting
TUC1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
UC1 definite time setting
UC2
0.5 – 10.0 A
(0.10 – 2.00 A)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
2.0 A
(0.40 A)
UC2 threshold setting
TUC2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
UC2 definite time setting
[UC1EN]
Off / On
Off
UC1 Enable
[UC2EN]
Off / On
Off
UC2 Enable
(*) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
⎯ 35 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.4
The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload
protection in GRD110 provides a good protection against damage caused by sustained
overloading. The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal
model.
The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
θ =
−t ⎞
I2 ⎛
⎜1 − e τ ⎟ × 100%
2
⎠
I AOL ⎝
(1)
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the
point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay
gives a trip output when θ= 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to
the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from ‘cold’ or from ‘hot’.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of the thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for
‘cold’ and ‘hot’. The cold curve is a special case of the hot curve where prior load current Ip is
zero, catering for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
⎡
⎤
I2
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2 ⎥
⎣ I − I AOL ⎦
(2)
⎡ I2 − I 2 ⎤
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2P ⎥
⎢⎣ I − I AOL ⎥⎦
(3)
where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
τ= thermal time constant (seconds)
Ln = natural logarithm
エラー! 参照元が見つかりません。2.4.1 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time
constant settings. The left-hand chart shows the ‘cold’ condition where an overload has been
switched onto a previously un-loaded system. The right-hand chart shows the ‘hot’ condition
⎯ 36 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
where an overload is switched onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its
capacity.
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve no prior load)
Thermal Curves (Hot Curve 90% prior load)
1000
1000
100
10
τ
1
100
50
Operate Time (minutes)
Operate Time (minutes)
100
10
1
τ
100
0.1
50
20
0.1
10
20
10
5
2
1
0.01
5
2
0.01
1
1
10
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 2.4.1
0.001
1
10
Overload Current (Multiple of
IAOL)
Thermal Curves
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.1 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM_ALARM and trip signal THM_TRIP. The alarming threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAEN] and [THMEN]
respectively or PLC signals THMA_BLOCK and THM_BLOCK.
77
&
A
THM
134
&
78
T
&
135
&
THM_ALARM
THM_TRIP
[THMAEN]
+
"ON"
[THMEN]
+
"ON"
1573 THMA_BLOCK
1
1572 THM_BLOCK
1
Figure 2.4.2
Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic
⎯ 37 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their
setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
THM
2.0 – 10.0 A
(0.40 – 2.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
5.0 A
(1.00 A)
Thermal overload setting.
(THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)
THMIP
0.0 – 5.0 A
(0.00 – 1.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
0.0 A
(0.00 A)
Previous load current
TTHM
0.5 - 100.0 min
0.1 min
10.0 min
Thermal time constant
THMA
50 – 99 %
1%
80 %
Thermal alarm setting.
(Percentage of THM setting.)
[THMEN]
Off / On
Off
Thermal OL enable
[THMAEN]
Off / On
Off
Thermal alarm enable
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.
Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal
element, and is only active when testing ([THMRST] = “ON”).
⎯ 38 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.5
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The negative sequence overcurrent protection (NOC) is used to detect asymmetrical faults
(phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults) with high sensitivity in conjunction with phase
overcurrent protection and residual overcurrent protection. It also used to detect load unbalance
conditions.
Phase overcurrent protection must be set to lower sensitivity when the load current is large but
NOC sensitivity is not affected by magnitude of the load current, except in the case of erroneous
negative sequence current due to the unbalanced configuration of the distribution lines.
For some earth faults, only a small zero sequence current is fed while the negative sequence
current is comparatively larger. This is probable when the fault occurs at the remote end with a
small reverse zero sequence impedance and most of the zero sequence current flows to the remote
end.
In these cases, NOC backs up the phase overcurrent and residual overcurrent protection. The NOC
also protects the rotor of a rotating machine from over heating by detecting a load unbalance.
Unbalanced voltage supply to a rotating machine due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the
negative sequence current and in machine heating.
GRD110 provides the negative sequence overcurrent protection with definite time characteristics.
Two independent elements NOC1 and NOC2 are provided for tripping and alarming.
The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and the scheme switch
[APPL-CT] is set to “3P”.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.5.1 and 2.5.2 show the scheme logic of directional negative sequence overcurrent
protection NOC1 and NOC2.
Figure 2.5.1 shows the scheme logic of negative sequence overcurrent protection NOC1 with
inverse time or definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite time
protection is selected by setting [MNC1] to “DT”, and the trip signal NOC1 TRIP is given through
the delayed pick-up timer TEF1. The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MNC1] to any
one of “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “CON” and then setting [MNC1C] according to the required
IDMT characteristic, and the trip signal NOC1_TRIP is given.
The NOC2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown
in Figure 2.5.2. The scheme logic of NOC2 is the same as that of the NOC1.
The NOC1 and NOC2 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [NC1EN], [NC2EN] and
[APPL-CT] or the PLC signals NOC1_BLOCK and NOC2_BLOCK respectively.
The scheme switch [APPL-CT] is available in which three-phase overcurrent protection can be
selected. The NOC protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL-CT]
is set to “3P”.
⎯ 39 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
NOC1
TNC1
79
&
&
0
t
136
≥1
NOC1_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[NC1-2F
+ "Block"
&
ICD
NOC1
(INST)
170
&
[NOC1]
+
[NC1-EN]
+ "OFF"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
1
"US"
"CON"
"DT"
1560 NOC1_BLOCK
1
Figure 2.5.1
NOC2
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection NOC1 Scheme Logic
TNC2
80
t
&
&
0
≥1
137
NOC2_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[NC2-2F
+ "Block"
&
ICD
NOC2
(INST)
185
&
[NOC2]
+
[NC2-EN]
+ "OFF"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
1
"US"
"CON"
"DT"
1561 NOC2_BLOCK
1
Figure 2.5.2
Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection NOC2 Scheme Logic
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the NOC protection and their setting
ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
NC1
0.5 – 10.0 A
(0.10 – 2.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
2.0 A
(0.40 A)
NOC1 threshold setting.
TNC1
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
NOC1 definite time setting. Required if [MNC1] = DT.
TNC1M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
NOC1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MNC1] =
IEC, IEEE or US.
TNC1R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
NOC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if [NC1R]
= DEF.
TNC1RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
NC1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.
Required if [NC1R] = DEP.
⎯ 40 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
NC2
0.5 - 10.0 A
(0.10 – 2.00 A)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
1.0 A
(0.20 A)
NOC2 threshold setting.
TNC2
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
1.00 s
NOC2 definite time setting. Required if [MNC2] = DT.
TNC2M
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
NOC2 time multiplier setting. Required if [MNC2] =
IEC, IEEE or US.
TNC2R
0.0 – 300.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
NOC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if [NC2R]
= DEF.
TNC2RM
0.010 – 1.500
0.001
1.000
NC2 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.
Required if [NC2R] = DEP.
[NC1EN]
Off / On
Off
NOC1 Enable
[MNC1C]
NOC1 inverse curve type.
MNC1C-IEC
MNC1C-IEEE
MNC1C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MNC1] = IEC.
Required if [MNC1] = IEEE.
Required if [MNC1] = US.
[NC1R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
NOC1 reset characteristic. Required if [MNC1] = IEEE
or US.
[NC2EN]
Off / On
Off
NOC2 Enable
[MNC2C]
NOC2 inverse curve type.
MNC2C-IEC
MNC2C-IEEE
MNC2C-US
NI / VI / EI / LTI
MI / VI / EI
CO2 / CO8
NI
MI
CO2
Required if [MNC2] = IEC.
Required if [MNC2] = IEEE.
Required if [MNC2] = US.
[NC2R]
DEF / DEP
DEF
NOC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MNC2] = IEEE
or US.
[APPL-CT]
3P / 2P / 1P
3P
Three-phase current input
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.
Sensitive setting of NOC1 and NOC2 thresholds is restricted by the negative phase sequence
current normally present on the system. The negative phase sequence current is measured in the
relay continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel along with the
maximum value. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage and to set
NOC1 and NOC2 to 130 to 150% of the maximum value displayed.
The delay time setting TNC1 and TNC2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements
NOC1 and NOC2. The minimum operating time of the NOC elements is around 200ms.
⎯ 41 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.6
Series faults or open circuit faults which do not accompany any earth faults or phase faults are
caused by broken conductors, breaker contact failure, operation of fuses, or false operation of
single-phase switchgear.
Figure 2.6.1 shows the sequence network connection diagram in the case of a single-phase series
fault assuming that the positive, negative and zero sequence impedance of the left and right side
system of the fault location is in the ratio of k1 to (1 – k1), k2 to (1 – k2) and k0 to (1 – k0).
Single-phase series fault
E1A
E1B
1– k1
k1
k1Z1
I1F
I1F
(1-k1)Z1
E
E1B
Positive phase sequence
k2Z2
I2F
I2F
(1-k2)Z2
I0F
(1-k0)Z0
Negative phase sequence
k0Z0
I0F
Zero phase sequence
I1F
k2Z2
(1-k2)Z2
K0Z0
(1-k0)Z0
k1Z1
I1F
(1-k1)Z1
E1A
E1B
I1F
Z2
Z1
Z0
E1A
E1B
Figure 2.6.1 Equivalent Circuit for a Single-phase Series Fault
⎯ 42 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence
current I0F at the fault location for a single-phase series fault are given by:
I1F + I2F + I0F =0
(1)
Z2FI2F − Z0FI0F = 0
(2)
E1A − E1B = Z1FI1F − Z2FI2F
(3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
Z2 + Z0
I1F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A − E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
−Z0
I2F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A − E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
−Z2
I0F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A − E1B)
1 2
1 0
2 0
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of negative
to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given by the negative and zero sequence
impedance of the system:
Z0
I2F |I2F|
=
=
I1F |I1F| Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of the BCD element is shown in Figure 2.6.2 for stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1| ≥ BCD
setting
|I1| ≥ 0.04×In
|I2| ≥ 0.01×In
0.01×In
0
I1
0.04×In
Figure 2.6.2
In: rated current
BCD Element Characteristic
⎯ 43 ⎯
&
BCD
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.6.3 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. BCD element outputs trip
signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN], [APPL] or PLC signal BCD
BLOCK. The scheme switch [APPL] is available in Model 400 and 420 in which three-phase or
two-phase phase overcurrent protection can be selected. The broken conductor protection is
enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL] is set to “3P” in those models.
BCD
81
&
138
BCD_TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[BCDEN]
+
TBCD
0
t
"ON"
[APPL]
+
"3P"
1574 BCD_BLOCK
1
Figure 2.6.3 Broken Conductor Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and
their setting ranges.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
BCD
0.10 – 1.00
0.01
0.20
I2 / I1
TBCD
0.00 – 300.00s
0.01s
0.00 s
BCD definite time setting
[BCDEN]
Off / On
Off
BCD Enable
[APPL]
3P / 2P / 1P
3P
Three-phase current input. Only
required in Model 400 and 420.
Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present in the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay continuously
and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the maximum value of
the last 15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage.
The BCD setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.
TBCD should be set to more than 1 cycle to prevent unwanted operation caused by a transient
operation such as CB closing.
⎯ 44 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.7
Breaker Failure Protection
When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the
fault by backtripping adjacent circuit breakers.
If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker
failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element CBF provided for each
phase. For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element (less than
20ms) is used. The CBF element resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating value as
shown in Figure 2.7.1.
Pick-up
Drop-off
I
0
Drop-off/Pick-up=0.8
Figure 2.7.1
CBF element Characteristic
In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original
breaker. To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original
breaker again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the adjacent
breakers following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use retripping
at all, or use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping with trip
command plus overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operate
correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
Scheme logic
BFP initiation is performed on a per-phase basis. Figure 2.7.2 shows the scheme logic for the BFP.
The BFP is started by single phase reclose initiation signals CBF_INIT-A to CBF_INIT-C or
three-phase reclose initiation signal CBF_INIT. (These signals are assigned by the PLC default
setting). These signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present.
The backtripping signal to the adjacent breakers CBF_TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
CBF or CBFEF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after
initiation. Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with scheme switch [BTC].
There are two kinds of modes for the retrip signal to the original breaker CBF_RETRIP, the mode
in which retrip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF or CBFEF, and the direct trip mode in
which retrip is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the
scheme switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], “DIR” is the direct trip mode, and “OC” is the
trip mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF and CBFEF.
Figure 2.7.3 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If the
circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and the
BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should include
that of TRTC.
⎯ 45 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
If the CBF or CBFEF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after
the setting time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF and CBFEF are reset by retrip. TBTC
does not time-out and the BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated
by mistake and unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.
If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the CBF or CBFEF continues operating and the
TBTC finally picks up. A trip command CBF_TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP
is completed.
The CBF and CBFEF can be disabled by the scheme switches [CBFOCEN] and [CBFEFEN].
The BFP protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [BTC] and [RTC] or the PLC signal
CBF_BLOCK.
CBF_OP-A
A
&
&
&
&
≥1
323
&
&
&
≥1
&
"ON"
[APPL-CT]
&
&
[BTC]
+
"3P"
CBFEF
319
t
0
320
t
0
321
CBF_TRIP-A
CBF_TRIP-B
CBF_TRIP-C
0.00 - 300.00s
≥1
"ON"
140
CBF_TRIP
TRTC
100
≥1
&
[CBFEFEN]
+
0
CBF_OP-C
324
[CBFOCEN]
+
t
CBF_OP-B
84
C
+
≥1
83
CBF B
TBTC
322
82
"ON"
&
≥1
&
≥1
t
0
315
t
0
316
t
0
317
CBF_RETRIP-A
CBF_RETRIP-B
CBF_RETRIP-C
0.00 - 300.00s
1660 CBF_INIT-A
≥1
&
1661 CBF_INIT-B
≥1
&
1662 CBF_INIT-C
≥1
Default setting
GEN._TRIP
&
[RTC]
1663 CBF_INIT
+
"OC"
"DIR"
[APPL-CT]
+
1570 CBF_BLOCK
Figure 2.7.2
"3P"
&
1
Breaker Failure Protection Scheme Logic
⎯ 46 ⎯
≥1
139 CBF_RETRIP
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Fault
Start CBFP
Trip
Adjacent
breakers Closed
Open
TRIP
Retrip
Normal trip
Original
breakers Closed
Open
Open
Tcb
Tcb
OCBF
Toc
TBF1
Toc
TRTC
CBF
RETRIP
TBF2
TBTC
CBF
TRIP
Figure 2.7.3
Sequence Diagram
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
CBF
0.5 – 10.0 A
0.1 A
2.5 A
Overcurrent setting for CBF (OCBF trip)
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*)
(0.01 A)
(0.50 A)
0.5 – 10.0 A
0.1 A
2.5 A
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*)
(0.01 A)
(0.50 A)
TRTC
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.40 s
Retrip time setting
TBTC
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.01 s
0.50 s
Back trip time setting
[CBFOCEN] Off / On
On
OCBF trip use or not
[CBFEFEN]
Off / On
Off
EFBF trip use or not
[RTC]
Off / DIR / OC
Off
Retrip control
[BTC]
Off / On
Off
Back trip control
CBFEF
Earth fault overcurrent setting for CBF (EFBF trip)
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other
current values are in the case of 5 A rating.
The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of
the rated current.
The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker
(Tcb in Figure 2.7.3) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.7.3). The timer
setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
⎯ 47 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBTC = TCBF1 + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
CBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.
⎯ 48 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.8
Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush
GRD110 provides the following two schemes to prevent incorrect operation from a magnetising
inrush current during transformer energisation.
2.8.1
-
Protection block by inrush current detector
-
Cold load protection
Inrush current detector ICD detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer
energisation and blocks the following protections:
-
OC1 to OC4
EF1 to EF4
SEF1 to SEF4
NOC1 and NOC2
BCD
Blocking can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switches [OC∗-2F], [EF∗-2F],
[SEF∗-2F], [NOC∗-2F] and [BCD-2F].
The ICD detects the ratio ICD-2f between the second harmonic current I2f and fundamental
current I1f in each phase current, and operates if its ratio is larger than the setting value. Figure
2.8.1 shows the characteristic of the ICD element and Figure 2.8.2 shows the ICD block scheme.
When ICD operates, OC, EF, SEF, NOC and BCD elements are blocked independently. The
scheme logic of each element is shown in the previous sections.
I2f/I1f
|I2f|/|I1f|≥ICD-2f(%)
|I1f|≥ICDOC
ICD-2f(%)
0
I1f
ICDOC
Figure 2.8.1
A
ICD
B
C
ICD Element Characteristic
261
≥1
262
263
Figure 2.8.2
ICD Block Scheme
⎯ 49 ⎯
ICD
&
ICD
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ICD-2f
10 – 50%
1%
15%
Second harmonic detection
ICDOC
0.5 – 25.0 A
(0.10 - 5.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
0.5 A
(0.10 A)
ICD threshold setting
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.
2.8.2
Cold Load Protection
GRD110 provides cold load protection to prevent incorrect operation from a magnetising inrush
current during transformer energisation.
In normal operation, the load current on the distribution line is smaller than the sum of the rated
loads connected to the line. But it amounts to several times the maximum load current for a
moment when all of the loads are energised at once after a long interruption, and decreases to 1.5
times normal peak load after three or four seconds.
To protect those lines with an overcurrent element, it is necessary to use settings to discriminate
the inrush current in cold load restoration and the fault current.
This function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after closing on to the type
of load that takes a high level of load on energisation. This is achieved by a ‘Cold Load Setting’, in
which the user can program an alternative setting. Normally the user will choose higher current
settings within this setting.
A state transition diagram and its scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.8.3 and Figure 2.8.4 for the
cold load protection. Note that the scheme requires the use of two binary inputs assigned by PLC
function, one each for CB OPEN and CB CLOSED.
Under normal conditions, where the circuit breaker has been closed for some time, the scheme is in
STATE 0, and the normal default setting is applied to the overcurrent protection.
If the circuit breaker opens then the scheme moves to STATE 1 and runs the Cold Load Enable
timer TCLE. If the breaker closes again while the timer is running, then STATE 0 is re-entered.
Alternatively, if TCLE expires then the load is considered cold and the scheme moves to STATE
2, and stays there until the breaker closes, upon which it goes to STATE 3.
In STATE 2 and STATE 3, the ‘Cold Load Setting’ is applied.
In STATE 3 the Cold Load Reset timer TCLR runs. If the circuit breaker re-opens while the timer
is running then the scheme returns to STATE 2. Alternatively, if TCLR expires then it goes to
STATE 0, the load is considered warm and normal settings can again be applied.
Accelerated reset of the cold load protection is also possible. In STATE 3, the phase currents are
monitored by overcurrent element ICLDO and if all phase currents drop below the ICLDO
threshold for longer than the cold load drop off time (TCLDO) then the scheme automatically
reverts to STATE 0. The accelerated reset function can be enabled with the scheme switch
[CLDOEN] setting.
Cold load protection can be disabled by setting [CLEN] to “Off”.
To test the cold load protection function, the switch [CLPTST] is provided to set the STATE 0 or
STATE 3 condition forcibly.
⎯ 50 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings Group: Normal
Monitor CB status
CB opens
CB closes
within
T CLE time
STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings Group: Normal
Run T CLE timer
Monitor CB status
T CLE timer
expires
STATE 3
CB closes
STATE 2
CB status: Closed
Settings Group: Cold Load
CB status: Open
Settings Group: Cold Load
Monitor CB status
Figure 2.8.3
IL<ICLDO for
T CLDO time
T CLR timer
expires
CB opens within
CLR time
Run T CLR timer
Monitor CB status
Monitor load current IL
State Transition Diagram for Cold Load Protection
146
STATE 0
Chan
STAT
&
TCLE
147
STATE 1
&
0
t
≥1
Chan
STAT
≥1
Chan
STAT
0.0 - 10000.0s
&
148
STATE 2
Chan
STAT
&
149
STATE 3
&
TCLR
[CLEN]
+
"OFF"
&
1
1633 CB_N/O_CONT
CONSTANT 1
1634 CB_N/C_CONT
A
389
CB_CLOSE
≥1
1
1
390
CB_OPEN
TCLDO
85
≥1
ICLDO B
86
C
87
0
0.0 - 10000.0s
Default setting
BI2 COMMAND
t
&
1
t
0
0.00 - 100.00s
[CLDOEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.8.4
Scheme Logic for Cold Load Protection
⎯ 51 ⎯
[CLPTST] "S0"
+
"S3"
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the cold load protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
ICLDO
0.5 – 10.0 A
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
2.5 A
(0.50 A)
Cold load drop-off threshold setting
TCLE
0-10000 s
1s
100 s
Cold load enable timer
TCLR
0-10000 s
1s
100 s
Cold load reset timer
TCLDO
0.00-100.00 s
0.01 s
0.00 s
Cold load drop-off timer
[CLEN]
Off / On
Off
Cold load protection enable
[CLDOEN]
Off / On
Off
Cold load drop-off enable
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.
Further, relay element settings (OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF4, NOC1, NOC2 and
BCD) are required for the cold load protection (CLP) as follows:
Element
CLP-
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OC1
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
10.0 A
(2.00 A)
OC1 threshold setting in CLP mode
OC2
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
25.0 A
(5.00 A)
OC3
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
100.0 A
(20.00 A)
OC4
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
200.0 A
(40.00 A)
EF1
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
10.0 A
(2.00 A)
EF1 threshold setting in CLP mode
EF2
0.1 – 25.0 A
(0.02 – 5.00 A)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
25.0 A
(5.00 A)
EF3
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
100.0 A
(20.00 A)
EF4
0.1 – 250.0 A
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
200.0 A
(40.00 A)
SE1
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.10 A
(0.020 A)
SEF1 threshold setting in CLP mode
SE2
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.10 A
(0.020 A)
SE3
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.10 A
(0.020 A)
SE4
0.01 – 1.00 A
(0.002 – 0.200 A)(*)
0.01 A
(0.001 A)
0.10 A
(0.020 A)
NC1
0.5 – 10.0 A
(0.10 – 2.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
4.0 A
(0.80 A)
NOC1 threshold setting in CLP mode
NC2
0.5 – 10.0 A
(0.10 – 2.00 A)(*)
0.1 A
(0.01 A)
2.0 A
(0.40 A)
NOC2 threshold setting in CLP mode
BCD
0.10 – 1.00
0.01
0.40
BCD threshold setting in CLP mode
⎯ 52 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.10 Trip Signal Output
GRD110 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip
and alarm for each protection. Figures 2.10.1, 2.10.2 and 2.10.3 show gathered trip and alarm
signals for each protection.
GRD110 provides 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.7. These
auxiliary relays can be assigned to any protection outputs by PLC function.
After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can
be programmed by PLC function. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input by PLC signal. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by
monitoring the` status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker
tripping coil current.
OC1 TRIP
OC2 TRIP
OC3 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP
≥1
CBF INIT
EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
SEF1-S2 TRIP
SEF2 TRIP
SEF3 TRIP
UC1 TRIP
THM TRIP
NOC1 TRIP
≥1
BCD TRIP
CBF RETRIP
GENERAL TRIP
Binary output circuit
≥1
&
≥1
BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Inst"
&
"Dw"
+
0
t
0.00 – 10.00s
"Dl"
&
"Latch"
Tripping output relay
S
R
F/F
Reset button
+
≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.1 Tripping Output for Local Circuit Breaker
⎯ 53 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
CBF TRIP
&
≥1
≥1
BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Inst"
0
&
"Dw"
t
Tripping output relay
0.00 – 10.00s
+
"Dl"
&
S
"Latch"
R
F/F
Reset button
+
≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.2 Tripping Output for Adjacent Circuit Breakers
OC4 ALARM
≥1
EF4 ALARM
SEF4 ALARM
NOC2 ALARM
UC2 ALARM
≥1
380
GEN_ALARM
≥1
≥1
THM ALARM
OC4-A ALARM
UC2-A ALARM
OC4-B ALARM
≥1
381
≥1
382
≥1
383
≥1
384
GEN_ALARM-A
GEN_ALARM-B
UC2-B ALARM
OC4-C ALARM
UC2-C ALARM
EF4 ALARM
SEF4 ALARM
Figure 2.10.3
⎯ 54 ⎯
Alarm Output
GEN_ALARM-C
GEN_ALARM-N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.11 Application of Protection Inhibits
All GRD110 protection elements can be blocked by a binary input signal. This feature is useful in
a number of applications.
2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection
Conventional time-graded definite time overcurrent protection can lead to excessive fault
clearance times being experienced for faults closest to the source. The implementation of a
blocked overcurrent scheme can eliminate the need for grading margins and thereby greatly
reduce fault clearance times. Such schemes are suited to radial feeder circuits, particularly where
substations are close together and pilot cables can be economically run between switchboards.
Figure 2.11.1 shows the operation of the scheme.
Instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up signals OC1HS, EF1HS and SEF1HS of OC1,
EF1 and SEF1 elements are allocated to any of the binary output relays and used as a blocking
signal. OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protections are set with a short delay time. (For pick-up signals, refer
to Figure 2.1.7, 2.1.11 and 2.2.2.)
For a fault at F as shown, each relay sends the blocking signal to its upstream neighbor. The signal
is input as a binary input signal OC2 BLOCK, EF2 BLOCK and SEF2 BLOCK at the receiving
end, and blocks the OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protection. Minimum protection delays of 50ms are
recommended for the OC2, EF2 and SEF2 protection, to ensure that the blocking signal has time
to arrive before protection operation.
Inverse time graded operation with elements OC1, EF1 and SEF1 are available with the scheme
switch [MOC1], [MEF1] and [MSE1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of a
failure of the blocked scheme.
F
Trip
GRD110
GRD110
GRD110
OC2/EF2/SEF2
OC2/EF2/SEF2
High
Speed
Block
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
Figure 2.11.1
OC2/EF2/SEF2
High
Speed
Block
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
Blocked Overcurrent Protection
2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection
Non-directional overcurrent protection can be applied to provide a busbar zone scheme for a
simple radial system where a substation has only one source, as illustrated in Figure 2.11.2.
For a fault on an outgoing feeder F1, the feeder protection sends a hardwired blocking signal to
inhibit operation of the incomer, the signal OCHS, EFHS and SEFHS being generated by the
instantaneous phase fault, and earth fault pick-up outputs of OC1, EF1 and SEF1 allocated to any
of the binary output relays. Meanwhile, the feeder is tripped by the OC1, EF1 and SEF1 elements,
programmed with inverse time or definite time delays and set to grade with downstream
protections.
The incomer protection is programmed to trip via its instantaneous elements OC2, EF2 and SEF2
set with short definite time delay settings (minimum 50ms), thus providing rapid isolation for
faults in the busbar zone F2.
⎯ 55 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
At the incomer, inverse time graded operation with elements OC1, EF1 and SEF1 are available
with the scheme switch [MOC1], [MEF1] and [MSE1] setting, thus providing back-up protection
in the event of failure of the blocked scheme.
GRD110 integrated circuit breaker failure protection can be used to provide additional back-trips
from the feeder protection to the incomer, and from the incomer to the HV side of the power
transformer, in the event of the first trip failing to clear the earth fault.
In the case of more complex systems where the substation has two incomers, or where power can
flow into the substation from the feeders, then directional protection must be applied.
GRD110
Delayed Back -up Trip
OC1/EF1/SEF1
High Speed Block to Incomer for Feeder Fault
OC2/ EF2/SEF2
Fast Trip
F2
Feeder Trip
Feeder Trip
GRD110
Feeder Trip
GRD110
GRD110
OC1/EF1/SEF1
OC1/EF1/SEF1
OC1/EF1/SEF1
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
OCHS/EFHS/
SEFHS
F1
Figure 2.11.2
Blocked Busbar Protection Scheme 1
⎯ 56 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.12
CT Requirements
2.12.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection
Protection class current transformers are normally specified in the form shown below. The CT
transforms primary current within the specified accuracy limit, for primary current up to the
overcurrent factor, when connected to a secondary circuit of the given burden.
5 P 20 : 10VA
Accuracy
Limit (%)
Overcurrent
Factor
Maximum Burden
(at rated current)
Accuracy limit : Typically 5 or 10%. In applications where current grading is to be applied and
small grading steps are desirable, then a 5% CT can assist in achieving the necessary accuracy. In
less onerous applications, a limit of 10% may be acceptable.
Overcurrent factor : The multiple of the CT rating up to which the accuracy limit is claimed,
typically 10 or 20 times. A value of 20 should be specified where maximum fault current is high
and accurate inverse time grading is required. In applications where fault current is relatively low,
or where inverse time grading is not used, then an overcurrent factor of 10 may be adequate.
Maximum burden : The total burden calculated at rated secondary current of all equipment
connected to the CT secondary, including relay input burden, lead burden, and taking the CT’s
own secondary resistance into account. GRD110 has an extremely low AC current burden,
typically less than 0.1VA for a 1A phase input, allowing relatively low burden CTs to be applied.
Relay burden does not vary with settings.
If a burden lower than the maximum specified is connected, then the practical overcurrent factor
may be scaled accordingly. For the example given above, at a rated current of 1A, the maximum
value of CT secondary resistance plus secondary circuit resistance (RCT + R2) should be 10Ω. If
a lower value of, say, (RCT + R2) = 5Ω is applied, then the practical overcurrent factor may be
increased by a factor of two, that is, to 40A.
In summary, the example given of a 5P20 CT of suitable rated burden will meet most applications
of high fault current and tight grading margins. Many less severe applications may be served by
5P10 or 10P10 transformers.
2.12.2 Minimum Knee Point Voltage
An alternative method of specifying a CT is to calculate the minimum knee point voltage,
according to the secondary current which will flow during fault conditions:
Vk ≥ If (RCT + R2)
where:
Vk = knee point voltage
If = maximum secondary fault current
RCT = resistance of CT secondary winding
R2 = secondary circuit resistance, including lead resistance.
When using this method, it should be noted that it is often not necessary to transform the
maximum fault current accurately. The knee point should be chosen with consideration of the
⎯ 57 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
settings to be applied and the likely effect of any saturation on protection performance. Further,
care should be taken when determining R2, as this is dependent on the method used to connect the
CTs (E.g. residual connection, core balanced CT connection, etc).
2.12.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
A core balance CT should be applied, with a minimum knee point calculated as described above.
2.12.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
High accuracy CTs should be selected with a knee point voltage Vk chosen according to the
equation:
Vk ≥ 2× Vs
where Vs is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
⎯ 58 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2.13 Autoreclose
The GRD110 provides a multi-shot (five shots) autoreclosing scheme applied for one-circuit
breaker:
• Three phase autoreclosing scheme for all shots
• Integrated synchronism check function for autoreclosing
• Autoreclosing counter
The autoreclosing (ARC) can be initialized by OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1-S1 to SEF4 trip
signals or external trip signals via PLC signals EXT_∗∗∗∗∗, as determined by scheme switches
[∗∗∗∗-INIT]. Trip signals are selected to be used or not used for ARC, by setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] to
“On” or “NA” respectively. If a trip signal is used to block ARC, then [∗∗∗∗-INIT] is set to
“BLK”. ARC can also be blocked by the PLC signal ARC_BLOCK.
Three-phase autoreclosing is provided for all shots, regardless of whether the fault is single-phase
or multi-phase. Autoreclosing can be programmed to provide any number of shots, from one to
five. In each case, if the first shot fails, then all subsequent shots apply three-phase tripping and
reclosing.
To disable autoreclosing, scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "Off".
The GRD110 also provides a manual close function. The manual close can be performed by
setting the PLC signal MANUAL_CLOSE.
2.13.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.13.1 shows the simplified scheme logic for the autoreclose. Autoreclose becomes ready
when the circuit breaker is closed and ready for autoreclose (CB READY=1), the on-delay timer
TRDY is picked up, and the [ARCEN] is set to "ON". TRDY is used to determine the reclaim time.
If the autoreclose is ready, then reclosing can be activated by the PLC signal ARC_INIT,
EXT_TRIP-A, EXT_TRIP-B, EXT_TRIP-C or EXT_TRIP, etc.
Auto-reclose condition such as voltage and synchronism check, etc., can be offered by PLC
signals ARC-S∗_COND.
Once autoreclose is activated, it is maintained by a flip-flop circuit until one reclosing cycle is
completed.
Autoreclose success (ARC SUCCESS) or fail (ARC FAIL) can be displayed as an event record
message by the event record setting.
Multi-shot autoreclose
Regardless of the tripping mode, three-phase reclose is performed. If the [ARCEN] is set to "On",
the dead time counter TD1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has elapsed,
reclosing command ARC-SHOT is initiated.
Multi-shot autoreclose can be executed up to four times after the first-shot autoreclose fails. The
multi-shot mode, one to five shots, is set with the scheme switch [ARC∗-NUM].
During multi-shot reclosing, the dead time counter TD2 for the second shot is activated if the first
shot autoreclose is performed, but tripping occurs again. Second shot autoreclose is performed
after the period of time set on TD2 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 =
1, SP2 = 0, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
Autoreclose is completed at this step if the two shots mode is selected for the multi-shot mode. In
this case, tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
⎯ 59 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
If three shot mode is selected for the multi-shot mode, autoreclose is further retried after the above
tripping occurs. At this time, the TD3 is started. The third shot autoreclose is performed after the
period of time set on the TD3 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1 = 0,
SP2 = 1, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
The three shot mode of autoreclose is then completed, and tripping following a
"reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
When four or five shot autoreclose is selected, autoreclose is further retried once again for tripping
that occurs after "reclose-onto-a-fault". This functions in the same manner as the three shot
autoreclose.
If a fault occurs under the following conditions, the final trip is performed and autoreclose is
blocked.
• Reclosing block signal is applied.
• During the reclaim time
• Auto-reclose condition by PLC signals ARC-S∗_COND is not completed.
In the OC∗, EF∗ and SE∗ protections, each tripping is selected by setting [OC∗-TP∗], [EF∗-TP∗]
or [SE∗-TP∗] to any one of “Inst”(instantaneous trip), “Set”(delayed trip by T∗∗∗ and [M∗∗∗]
setting) or “Off”(blocked). (See Section 2.1 and 2.2.)
PLC default setting
BI3 COMMAND
401
TRDY
t
0
1605 ARC_READY
&
&
0.0-600.0s
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
ARC INIT (Trip command)
≥1
TP1
S
F/F
R
VCHK
402
ARC IN-PROG
&
ARC-S1
ARC-SHOT1
S
F/F
R
TD1
t
0
404
&
0.01-300.00s
1648 ARC-S1_COND
TR1
t
0
EXT TRIP
Coordination
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
Autoreclose initiation
&
ARC-S2
ARC-SHOT2
VCHK
S
F/F
R
TD2
t
0
405
&
0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT1
1649 ARC-S2_COND
TR2
t
0
ARC-SHOT2
ARC-SHOT3 ≥1
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
&
ARC-S3
ARC-SHOT3
VCHK
S
F/F
R
1650 ARC-S3_COND
ARC-SHOT4
TD3
t
0
406 ARC-SHOT5
&
0.01-300.00s
TR3
t
0
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
&
ARC-S4
ARC-SHOT1
≥1
ARC-SUCCESS
VCHK
S
F/F
R
TD4
t
0
407
&
0.01-300.00s
1651 ARC-S4_COND
TR4
t
0
ARC FAIL
ARC-FT
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
Reset
TRSET
t
0
CB CLOSE
See Fig. 2.1.50.
TARCP
t
0
&
0.01-300.00s
≥1
&
ARC-S5
ARC-SHOT5
&
VCHK
S
F/F
R
1652 ARC-S5_COND
TD5
t
0
TR5
t
0
TRCOV
0
t
0.01-310.00s
1
408
&
0.01-300.00s
0.1-600.0s
0.1-600.0s
STEP COUNTER
SHOT NUM1
SP0
ARC-S1
CLK SP1
SHOT NUM2
≥1
ARC-S2
SHOT NUM3
SP2
ARC-S3
SHOT NUM4
SP3
ARC-S4
SHOT NUM5
SP4
ARC-S5
SP5
SHOT NUM6
ARC-FT
&
1607 MANUAL_CLOSE
Figure 2.13.1 Autoreclose Scheme Logic
⎯ 60 ⎯
TW
≥1
403
ARC-SHOT
0.01-10.00s
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Autoreclose initiation
PLC signal input ARC-READY(CB& 63condition: default setting) is alive and Reclaim time
TRDY has elapsed and Scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "On," then autoreclose initiation is
ready. The reclaim time is selected by setting [TRDY] to “0.0-600.0s”.
Autoreclose initiation can consist of the following trips. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or
not is selected by setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT].
- OC1 to OC4 trip
- EF1 to EF4 trip
- SEF1 to SEF4 trip
Setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
EXT_TRIP-∗(External autoreclose initiation) or ARC_INIT is autoreclose initiation by PLC
signal input. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or not is selected by setting [EXT-INIT].
Setting [EXT-INIT] = NA / On / Block
PLC default setting
BI3 COMMAND
1605 ARC_READY
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
1628 EXT_TRIP-A
TRDY
t
0
0.0-600.0s
401
&
&
≥1
≥1
&
1629 EXT_TRIP-B
≥1
&
≥1
1630 EXT_TRIP-C
≥1
&
≥1
1631 EXT_TRIP
≥1
&
1
ARC initiation
TP1
1 cycle
∗∗∗-INIT = “ON”
1606 ARC_INIT
1608 ARC_NO_ACT
RS-ARCBLK
400
&
ARC_BLK_OR
≥1
&
[EXT-INIT]
+
BI4 COMMAND
1604 ARC_BLOCK
ON
BLK
&
∗∗∗-INIT = “BLK”
Figure 2.13.2 Autoreclose Initiation
Autoreclose shot output (ARC-SHOT)
The maximum number of autoreclosing shots is selected by setting [ARC-NUM].
Setting [ARC-NUM] = S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
The command output condition is passage of TD∗ time and PLC signals ARC-S∗_COND. The
default setting of PLC signals ARC-S∗_COND is assigned to VCHK.
The passage of TD∗ time(Dead timer) is selected on each shot number by setting [TD∗] to
“0.01-300.00s.”
The command output pulse(One shot) time is selected by setting [TW] to “0.01-10.00s.”
⎯ 61 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
&
TD1
t
0
S
F/F
ARCS1
ARC-SHOT1
&
0.01-300.00s
R
&
1648 ARC-S1_COND
VCHK
ARC-SHOT1
TD2
t
0
S
ARC-SHOT5
1649 ARC-S2_COND
VCHK
TD3
t
0
S
&
F/F
S3
R
0.01-300.00s
S
TD4
t
0
1650 ARC-S3_COND
VCHK
ARC-SHOT3
&
&
F/F
0.01-300.00s
R
S4
ARC-SHOT
0.01-10.00s
0.01-300.00s
R
ARC-SHOT2
&
ARC-SHOT4
TW
≥1
&
F/F
S2
ARC-SHOT2 ≥1
ARC-SHOT3
PLC default setting
ARC-SHOT4
1651 ARC-S4_COND
VCHK
TD5
&
0
S
&
F/F
0.01-300.00s
R
S5
VCHK
ARC-SHOT5
1652 ARC-S5_COND
Figure 2.13.3 Autoreclosing requirement
Autoreclose success judgement (ARC-SUCCESS)
If a re-trip is not executed within a period of time after the output of the autoreclosing shot, it is
judged that the autoreclose was successful - Autoreclose success(ARC-SUCCESS).
The period of time is selected by setting [TSUC] to “0.1-600.0s”.
Autoreclose failure judgement (ARC-FAIL)
If the CB contact or BI condition [CBOPN] is not closed within a period of time after output of
autoreclosing shot, it is judged Autoreclose failure(ARC-FAIL).
The period of time is selected by setting [TFAIL] to “0.1-600.0s”.
Whether the function is active or not is selected by setting [ARCFAIL] to “Off” or “On”.
Final trip judgement (ARC-FT)
The following cases are judged ARC-FT(Final Trip) and autoreclose is reset without autoreclose
output.
• Autoreclose initiation when autoreclose initiation is not ready
• Autoreclose initiation after the final shot output of the setting for the multi-shot mode
• Autoreclose block signal
- Autoreclose block signal by PLC input
- OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF 4 trip and external trip of setting autoreclose block
are active.
Setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
• PLC signal ARC-S∗_COND is not completed. FT is performed after Timer [TR*].
Reset
If CB CLOSE(CB close condition) signal is alive and the CB is closed within a period of time after
⎯ 62 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
autoreclose initiation, autoreclose is forcibly reset.
The period of time is selected by setting [TRSET] to “0.01-300.00s”.
It is assumed that the CB is not open(=CBF), in spite of the trip output(=autoreclose initiation).
RS-ARCBLK
≥1
&
CB CLOSE
ARC_RESET
TRSET
t
0
&
0.01-300.00s
ARC_IN-PROG
Figure 2.13.4 Reset
Manual close function (MANUAL CLOSE)
MANUAL CLOSE is able to close the CB via a PLC signal input.
Autoreclose initiation is not active within a period of time after the manual close command output.
The period of time is selected by setting [TARCP] to “0.1-600.0s”.
In the case of a final trip judgement, the manual close command output is blocked within a period
of time. The period of time is selected by setting [TRCOV] to “0.1-600.0s”.
ARC-FT
TARCP
t
0
0.1-600.0s
TRCOV
0
t
1
&
ARC_SHOT
0.1-600.0s
1579 MANUAL_CLOSE
Figure 2.13.5 Manual input function
2.13.2 Sequence Coordination
When two or more relays protect the same feeder their sequences (trip shot number) must be
coordinated. Considering the diagram as shown in Figure 2.13.6, relays A and B protect the same
feeder and both are programmed for 2 instantaneous and 2 IDMT trips. Both relays A and B ‘see’
the permanent fault at Fault F, and relays operate with instantaneous protection for 1st trip (at
SHOT NUM1) and 2nd trip (at SHOT NUM2).
3rd trip (at SHOT NUM3) is delayed, and the relays have different IDMT settings, so that relay B
only operates. Relay A does not trip and autoreclose, and judges the autoreclose succeeded. It
reclaims and returns to the beginning of its autoreclose cycle (= SHOT NUM1). Next, though the
relay B will attempt the delayed 4th trip (at SHOT NUM4), then mal-instantaneous trip will be
done by the relay A. In this case, the sequence co-ordination function is applied and the trip shot
number is coordinated as shown in Figure 2.5.12. The trip shot number is coordinated by the
operation of OC, EF or SEF element. The sensitivity (OC, EF or SEF) and the scheme switch
([COORD-OC], [COORD-EF] or [COORD-SE]) are set (See Section 2.5.4).
A
B
A:GRD110
B:GRD110
Figure 2.13.6
⎯ 63 ⎯
Relay Location
Fault F
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Co-ordination disabled:
1st trip 2nd trip
(Inst)
(Inst)
No trip & judged ARC succeed
1st trip (Inst): mal-operate
Relay A
1st trip 2nd trip 3rd trip
(Inst)
(Inst)
(IDMT)
No trip
Relay B
Co-ordination enabled:
1st trip 2nd trip
(Inst)
(Inst)
No trip
No trip
Relay A
1st trip 2nd trip 3rd trip
(IDMT)
(Inst)
(Inst)
4th trip
(IDMT)
Relay B
Figure 2.13.7
Sequence Coordination Function
2.13.3 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the autoreclose and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below.
Element
ARC
TRDY
TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
TD5
TR5
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
TFAIL
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
0.0 – 600.0 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.01 – 310.00 s
0.01 – 10.00 s
0.1 – 600.0 s
0.1 – 600.0 s
0.1 – 600.0 s
0.01 – 300.00 s
0.0 – 600.0 s
0.1 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.01 s
0.1 s
60.0 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
10.00 s
310.00 s
2.00 s
3.0 s
10.0 s
10.0 s
3.00 s
3.0 s
[ARCEN]
[ARC-NUM]
[ARCFAIL]
[OC1-INIT]
[OC1-TP1]
Off/On
S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
Off/On
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
Reclaim time
1st shot dead time
1st shot reset time
2nd shot dead time
2nd shot reset time
3rd shot dead time
3rd shot reset time
4th shot dead time
4th shot reset time
5th shot dead time
5th shot reset time
Output pulse time
Autoreclose succeed judgement time
Autoreclose recovery time after final trip
Autoreclose pause time after manually closing
Autoreclose reset time
Autoreclose confirmatory time after autoreclose
command
Autoreclose enable
Autoreclosing shot number
Autoreclosing confirmation
Autoreclose initiation by OC1
OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
On
S1
Off
NA
SET
⎯ 64 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Element
[OC1-TP2]
[OC1-TP3]
[OC1-TP4]
[OC1-TP5]
[OC1-TP6]
[OC2-INIT]
[OC2-TP1]
[OC2-TP2]
[OC2-TP3]
[OC2-TP4]
[OC2-TP5]
[OC2-TP6]
[OC3-INIT]
[OC3-TP1]
[OC3-TP2]
[OC3-TP3]
[OC3-TP4]
[OC3-TP5]
[OC3-TP6]
[OC4-INIT]
[OC4-TP1]
[OC4-TP2]
[OC4-TP3]
[OC4-TP4]
[OC4-TP5]
[OC4-TP6]
[EF1-INIT]
[EF1-TP1]
[EF1-TP2]
[EF1-TP3]
[EF1-TP4]
[EF1-TP5]
[EF1-TP6]
[EF2-INIT]
[EF2-TP1]
[EF2-TP2]
[EF2-TP3]
[EF2-TP4]
[EF2-TP5]
[EF2-TP6]
[EF3-INIT]
[EF3-TP1]
[EF3-TP2]
[EF3-TP3]
[EF3-TP4]
[EF3-TP5]
[EF3-TP6]
[EF4-INIT]
[EF4-TP1]
[EF4-TP2]
[EF4-TP3]
Range
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
OFF/INST/SET
Step
Default
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
SET
NA
SET
SET
SET
⎯ 65 ⎯
Remarks
OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
Autoreclose initiation by EF1
EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Element
[EF4-TP4]
[EF4-TP5]
[EF4-TP6]
[SE1-INIT]
[SE1-TP1]
[SE1-TP2]
[SE1-TP3]
[SE1-TP4]
[SE1-TP5]
[SE1-TP6]
[SE2-INIT]
[SE2-TP1]
[SE2-TP2]
[SE2-TP3]
[SE2-TP4]
[SE2-TP5]
[SE2-TP6]
[SE3-INIT]
[SE3-TP1]
[SE3-TP2]
[SE3-TP3]
[SE3-TP4]
[SE3-TP5]
[SE3-TP6]
[SE4-INIT]
[SE4-TP1]
[SE4-TP2]
[SE4-TP3]
[SE4-TP4]
[SE4-TP5]
[SE4-TP6]
[EXT-INIT]
[COORD-OC]
[COORD-EF]
[COORD-SE]
OC-CO
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
Autoreclose initiation by SE1
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE1 trip mode of 1st trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE1 trip mode of 2nd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE1 trip mode of 3rd trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
SE1 trip mode of 4th trip
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
OFF/INST/SET
SET
NA/A1/A2/BLK
NA
Autoreclose initiation by external trip command
Off/On
Off
OC-CO relay for Co-ordination
Off/On
Off
EF-CO relay for Co-ordination
Off/On
Off
SEF-CO relay for Co-ordination
0.1 A
5.0 A
OC-CO for co-ordination
0.1 − 250.0 A
(0.01 A)
(1.00 A)
(0.02 − 50.00 A) (*)
EF-CO
0.1 A
1.5 A
EF-CO for co-ordination
0.1 − 250.0 A
(0.01 A)
(0.30 A)
(0.02 − 50.00 A)
SEF-CO
0.01
A
0.050 A
SEF-CO for co-ordination
0.01 − 1.00 A
(0.01 A)
(0.010 A)
(0.002 − 0.200 A)
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
To determine the dead time, it is essential to find an optimal value while taking factors,
de-ionization time and power system stability, into consideration which normally contradict each
other.
Normally, a longer de-ionization time is required as for a higher line voltage or larger fault current.
For three-phase autoreclose, the dead time is generally 15 to 30 cycles.
⎯ 66 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3. Technical Description
3.1
Hardware Description
3.1.1
Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRD110 is shown in Appendix F.
The hardware structure of GRD110 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.
The GRD110 relay unit consists of the following hardware modules. These modules are fixed in a
frame and cannot be taken off individually. The human machine interface module is provided with
the front panel.
• Power module (POWD)
• Signal processing module (SPMD)
• Human machine interface module (HMI)
The hardware block diagram of GRD110 is shown in Figure 3.1.2.
SPMD
POWD
HMI
IN SERVI CE
TR IP
ALARM
VIEW
RESET
A
Handle for relay
withdrawal
B
0V CAN
CEL ENTER
END
Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure without Case
⎯ 67 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
DC
supply
Binary
input
AC input
I
POWD
ETH
Ethernet LAN I/F
× 1 or 2
SPMD2
DC/DC
Converter
Photo-coupler
×8
CT × 4
(Max)
Analogue
filter
Multiplexer
A/D
converter
MPU
RAM
ROM
Remote PC
RS485 or
Optical fibre
port × 1
Remote PC
Auxiliary relay
×8
Binary output
(Trip
command etc.)
IRIG-B port
External
clock
Human machine
Interface (HMI)
Liquid crystal display
16 characters × 2 lines
LEDs
Local
personal
computer
RS232C
I/F
Operation keys
Monitoring
jacks
Models 110D, 400D and 420D
Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Block Diagram
POWD Module
The POWD module insulates between the internal and external circuits through an auxiliary
transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit the electronic circuits. The
AC input signals may be one to three phase currents and a residual current depending on the relay
model.
This module incorporates max. 4 auxiliary CTs, DC/DC converter and 8 photo-coupler circuits for
binary input signals.
The available input voltage ratings of the DC/DC converter are, 48V, 110V/125V or 220/250V.
The normal range of input voltage is −20% to +20%.
SPMD Module
The SPMD module consists of analogue filter, multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter,
main processing unit (MPU), random access memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM) and
executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display.
The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies of
2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).
RS485, fibre optic and/or Ethernet LAN serial ports are provided for communication to a remote
PC, and IRIG-B port also can be provided for external clock. Ethernet LAN ports are mounted on
ETH sub-module.
Auxiliary relays for binary output signals are provided.
The SPMD module incorporates 8 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO7 and FAIL) for binary output
⎯ 68 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
signals. Auxiliary relays BO1 to BO6 are user configurable output signals and have one normally
open and one normally closed contact. BO7 is also a user-configurable output signal and has one
normally open contact. (Refer to Appendix G.) The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open
and one normally closed contacts, and operates when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC
circuit is detected.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module
The operator can access the GRD110 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.3, the HMI panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys, monitoring jacks and an RS232C connector on the front
panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 2 rows with a back-light and displays recording, status and
setting data.
There are a total of 9 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP
Red
Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM
Red
Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1)
Yellow
(LED2)
Yellow
(LED3)
Yellow
(LED4)
Yellow
(LED5)
Yellow
(LED6)
Yellow
LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed
for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic,
settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be
programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses
of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section
4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by user, either
by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by an output of alarm element
such as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, etc..
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key
clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the
settings or change the settings.
The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the
test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by
selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and setting it in the window and the
signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the "Signal List", see
Appendix C.)
⎯ 69 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.
Screw for cover
Liquid crystal
display
IN SERVICE
TRIP
ALARM
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
VIEW
RESET
Operation keys
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
A
B
Monitoring Jacks
RS232C connector
0V CAN
CEL ENTER
END
Screw for handle
To a local PC
Screw for cover
Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel
⎯ 70 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.2
Input and Output Signals
3.2.1
AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRD110 model and their respective
input terminal numbers. Model 400 and 420 depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
: Scheme switch [APPL] setting
Model
Term. No.
of TB1
3.2.2
110
400
400
400
420
420
420
3P
2P
1P
3P
2P
1P
1-2
---
A phase
current
A phase
current
---
A phase
current
A phase
current
---
3-4
---
B phase
current
C phase
current
---
B phase
current
C phase
current
---
5-6
Residual
current (E)
C phase
current
Residual
current (E)
Residual
current (E)
C phase
current
Residual
current (E)
Residual
current (E)
7-8
Zero
sequence
current (SE)
Residual
current (E)
---
---
Zero
Zero
Zero
sequence
sequence
sequence
current (SE) current (SE) current (SE)
Binary Input Signals
The GRD110 provides eight programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is
programmable by PLC function, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion.
The binary input circuit of the GRD110 is provided with a logic level inversion function and a
pick-up and drop-off delay timer function as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary
switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows the
inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact
meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv”
(inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s
respectively.
Logic level inversion function, and pick-up and drop-off delay timer settings are as follow:
Element
Contents
Range
Step
Default
BI1SNS - BI8SNS
Binary switch
Norm/ Inv
BI1PUD - BI8PUD
Delayed pick-up timer
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
BI1DOD - BI8DOD
Delayed drop-off timer
0.00 - 300.00s
0.01s
0.00
Norm
The operating voltage of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating and 138V
DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC rating and
125V DC at 220/250V DC.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between eight settings groups. Change of
active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 to 2647).
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16
characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI8 by setting.
⎯ 71 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
These alarm output signals are signal Nos. 2560 to 2563.
GRD110
(+) (−)
BI1
1284
BI1PUD
BI1DOD
t
0
0
[BI1SNS]
t
768
BI1
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2
1285
BI2PUD
BI2DOD
t
0
0
t
BI2
[BI2SNS]
769
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI8
1291
BI8PUD
BI8DOD
t
0
0
[BI8SNS]
t
775
BI8
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
1
0V
Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
3.2.3
Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix F. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRD110 provides 8 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for relay fail
output and seven programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO7. BO1 to BO7 can be programmed.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The
setting is respective for each output relay.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BOs
individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or
OR circuit with 6 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.2. The output circuit can be configured
according to the setting menu. Appendix H shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Inst”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Latch” by
the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can
be set by TBO. When “Dw” selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does
not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is continuous
for the input signal time.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit
is detected.
⎯ 72 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Signal List
&
Appendix B
Auxiliary relay
6 GATES
≥1
or
≥1
6 GATES
&
TBO
&
[RESET]
+
"Dw"
0
t
0.00 – 10.00s
"Dl"
&
S
F/F
"Lat"
R
Reset button
+
≥
By PLC
768
1639 IND.RESET
BI1_COMMAND
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
Element
[RESET]
Range
Inst Dl / Dw /Lat
Step
Default
See Appendix C
TBO
0.00 – 10.00s
0.01s
See Appendix C
⎯ 73 ⎯
Remarks
Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.2.4
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
GRD110 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logic on binary
signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc. can be
produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and the initiation trigger of fault records and disturbance records are
programmed using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for
using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For PLC tool, refer to the PLC
tool instruction manual.
Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool
⎯ 74 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.3
Automatic Supervision
3.3.1
Basic Concept of Supervision
Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a
power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The GRD110 implements an automatic supervision function,
based on the following concepts:
• The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
• When a failure occurs, the user should be able to easily identify the location of the failure.
3.3.2
Relay Monitoring
The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring
This monitoring is provided for models 400 and 420 and is available only for [APPL] = “3P”
setting.
The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health
of the AC input circuit is verified.
• CT circuit current monitoring
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) − 4 × Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) ≥ k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 20% of rated current
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred
in the AC input circuit. If the imbalance detected, the relay issues an alarm shown in Table 3.3.1.
A/D accuracy checking
An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and
that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are done to verify
that memory circuits are healthy:
• Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
• Setting value monitoring:
Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
⎯ 75 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
software is running normally.
DC Supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored, and is checked to see
that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.
The alarms are issued when the failure continues for a predetermined time. The times for each
monitoring item are as follows;
• A/D accuracy checking, memory monitoring, Watch Dog Timer, DC supply monitoring:
less than 1s
• AC input imbalance monitoring, sampling synchronization monitoring : 15s
3.3.3
Trip Circuit Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by a binary input. Figure 3.3.1 shows
a typical scheme. A binary input BIn is assigned to No.1632:TC_FAIL signal by PLC. When the
trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary input and the trip circuit. Then
logic signal of the binary input circuit BIn is "1".
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets and
the BIn output is "0". A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output when the BIn output is "0".
If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD
message.
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON". When
"OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB is closed.
(+)
BIn
Trip
output
1632 TC_FAIL
CB CLOSE
[TCSPEN]
+
CB trip coil
Figure 3.3.1
3.3.4
"OPT-ON"
t
1
0
1270
&
TCSV
0.4s
&
≥1
"ON"
Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme Logic
Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring
Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of circuit breaker (CB). If two
binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’, then the
CB state monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite
states. Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five seconds, then
a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in LCD message and
event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
⎯ 76 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
1633 CB_N/O_CONT
=1
1
t
0
&
1271
CBSV
5.0s
1634 CB_N/C_CONT
[CBSMEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 3.3.2 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are assigned to “CB_N/O_CONT” and
“CB_N/C_CONT” by PLC.
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring
Periodic maintenance of CB is required for checking of the trip circuit, the operation mechanism
and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of
fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of CB:
• Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism. The trip
counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and
informs user of time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
The counter can be initiated by PLC signals TP_COUNT and TP_COUNT-∗. The default
setting is the TP_COUNT is assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.
• Sum of the broken current quantity ∑Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability of
CB. The ∑Iy counter increments the value of current to the power ‘y’, recorded at the time of
issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric
withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of ∑I2t, and maintenance such as oil
changes, etc., may be required. ‘I’ is the fault current broken by CB. ‘t’ is the arcing time
within the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, ‘y’ is normally
set to 2 to monitor the broken current squared. For other circuit breaker types, especially those
for HV systems, ‘y’ may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued when the count for any
phase exceeds a user-defined setting ∑IyALM. This feature is not available in GRD110-110.
The ∑Iy count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [∑IyAEN].
The counter can be initiated by PLC signals SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C. The default setting is
the SGM_IY_A to SGM_IY_C are assigned to the GEN_TRIP signal.
• Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB
operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if the CB operation is
slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the
phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase
exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified
interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the
scheme switch [OPTAEN].
The CB operating time monitoring can be initiated by PLC signals OT_ALARM_A to
OT_ALARM_C. The default setting is the OT_ALARM_A to OT_ALARM_C are assigned to
the GEN_TRIP signal.
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
⎯ 77 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.3.5
PLC Data and IEC61850 Mapping Data Monitoring
If there is a failure in PLC data or IEC61850 mapping data, the function may be prevented.
Therefore, PLC data and IEC61850 mapping data are monitored and the respective alarms "PLC
stop" and "MAP stop" are issued if a failure is detected.
3.3.6
IEC61850 Communication Monitoring
The sending and receiving functions on the Ethernet LAN communication are monitored. The
receiving function is executed by checking GOOSE message receiving status, and the sending
function is executed by checking a “Ping” response to the other party. If a failure is detected, an
alarm of "GOOSE stop" or "Ping err" is issued.
These functions are disabled by setting the scheme switches [GSECHK] and [PINGCHK].
3.3.7
Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event record messages
are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The setting
is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item
LCD
Message
LED
"IN SERVICE"
LED
"ALARM"
External
alarm
Event record Message
AC input imbalance
monitoring
Err: CT
On/Off (2)
On
(4)
CT err
Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
A/D accuracy check
Err:A/D
Off
On
(4)
Relay fail
Memory monitoring
Err:SUM,
Err:RAM,
Err:BRAM,
Err:EEP
Off
On
(4)
Relay fail
----
Off
On
(4)
----
DC supply monitoring
Err: DC
Off
(3)
Off
Relay fail-A
Err:TC
On
On
Off
TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring
Err:CB
On
On
Off
CB err, Relay fail-A
CB condition monitoring
Trip count alarm
ALM:TP
COUNT
On
On
Off
TP COUNT ALM,
Relay fail-A
ALM: OP time
On
On
Off
OP time ALM, Relay fail-A
ALM:∑IY
On
On
Off
∑IY-A ALM, ∑IY-B ALM or
∑IY-C ALM, Relay fail-A
Watchdog Timer
Operating time alarm
∑Iy count alarm
⎯ 78 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Supervision Item
LCD
Message
LED
"IN SERVICE"
LED
"ALARM"
PLC data or IEC61850
mapping data monitoring
GOOSE message check
Err: PLC, Err:
MAP
On
On
(4)
Relay fail-A
Err: GOOSE
On
On
(4)
Relay fail-A
Err: Ping
On
On
(4)
Relay fail-A
Ping response check
External
alarm
Event record Message
(1): Diverse messages are provided as expressed with " Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is
shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.
3.3.8
Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
• A/D accuracy check
• Memory monitoring
• Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output (ALM&BLK),
or if only an alarm is output (ALM).
3.3.9
Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.
Element
Range
[SVCNT]
Step
Default
Remarks
ALM&BLK / ALM
ALM&BLK
Alarming and blocking or alarming only
[TCSPEN]
OFF/ON/OPT-ON
OFF
[CBSMEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
CB state monitoring
[TCAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
Trip count alarm
[∑IyAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
∑Iy count alarm
[OPTAEN]
OFF/ON
OFF
Operate time alarm
TCALM
1 - 10000
1
10000
Trip count alarm threshold setting
∑IyALM
10 – 10000 E6
E6
10000
∑Iy alarm threshold setting
YVALUE
1.0 – 2.0
0.1
2.0
y value setting
OPTALM
100 – 5000 ms
10 ms
1000 ms
Operate time alarm threshold setting
The scheme switch [SVCNT] is set in the "Application" sub-menu. Other scheme switches are set
in the "Scheme sw" sub-menu.
⎯ 79 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.4
Recording Function
The GRD110 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
3.4.1
Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRD110 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Power system quantities
User configurable initiation
User can configure four fault record triggers (Signal No.:2624 to 2627) by PLC. Any of input
signals as shown in Appendix B is assigned to these fault record trigger signals.
Up to the 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence
This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using
the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme such as OC1 and EF1 etc. that output the tripping command.
Operating phase
This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.
The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.
-
Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
-
Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
-
Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
-
The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
-
Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
The displayed power system quantities depend on relay model and its [APPL] setting as shown in
Table 3.4.1.
The zero sequence current Ie in “3P” setting of the model 420 is calculated from the three phase
input currents and the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is
displayed the current fed from CT.
⎯ 80 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Table 3.4.1 Displayed Power System Quantities
Model 110
Phase current
Model 400
Model 420
3P
2P
1P
3P
2P
1P
－
Ia, Ib, Ic
Ia, Ic
－
Ia, Ib, Ic
Ia, Ic
－
Zero sequence current
Ie, Ise
Ie
Ie
Ie
Ie, Ise
Ie, Ise
Ie, Ise
Positive and negative
sequence current
－
I1, I2
－
－
I1, I2
－
－
Ratio of Negative to positive
sequence current
－
I2 / I1
－
－
I2 / I1
－
－
Percentage of thermal
capacity
－
THM
THM
－
THM
THM
－
3.4.2
Event Recording
The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. Up to
1024 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 1024 records have been stored, the
oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
The user can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event
items can be assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On”
(only recording On transitions) or “On/Off”(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by
setting. The “On/Off” mode events are specified by “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger
events” is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events are “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events are “On”
mode.
The name of an event can be set by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set, but the LCD
displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11 characters are set. The
set name can be viewed on the Set.(view) screen.
The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.
The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix G.
3.4.3
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
BITRN
0 - 128
1
100
Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events
EV1 – EV128
0 - 3071
Assign the signal number
Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overcurrent starter element operates or a tripping
command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is started when a start command by the PLC
is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers (Signal No.:2632 to 2635) by
PLC.
The records include maximum 4 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals and
the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix C can be
assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1
and 5.0s.
⎯ 81 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time
0.1s
1.0s
2.0s
3.0s
3.5s
4.0s
4.5s
5.0s
50Hz
40
15
8
6
5
4
4
3
60Hz
40
13
7
5
4
3
3
3
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Element
Range
Step
Default
Remarks
Time
0.1-5.0 s
0.1 s
2.0
Post-fault recording time
OC
0.1-250.0 A
0.1 A
10.0 A
Overcurrent detection
(0.02-50.00 A
0.01 A
2.00 A) (*)
0.1-125.0 A
0.1 A
3.0 A
(0.02-25.00 A
0.01 A
0.60A)
0.01-1.00 A
0.01 A
1.00 A
(0.002-0.200 A
0.001 A
0.200 A)
0.5-10.0 A
0.1 A
2.0 A
(0.10-2.00 A
0.01 A
0.40 A)
EF
SEF
NOC
Earth fault detection
Sensitive earth fault detection
Negative sequence overcurrent detection
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are for the case of a 1A rating. Other current values are
for the case of a 5A rating.
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.
Element
Range
[Trip]
Step
Default
Remarks
OFF/ON
ON
Start by tripping command
[OC]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by OC operation
[EF]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by EF operation
[SEF]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by SEF operation
[NOC]
OFF/ON
ON
Start by NC operation
⎯ 82 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.5
Metering Function
The GRD110 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
measurement data shown below is renewed every second and displayed on the LCD of the relay
front panel or on the local or remote PC.
-
Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
-
Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
-
Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
-
The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
-
Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
-
Maximum phase current (Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax)
-
Maximum zero sequence current (Iemax, Isemax)
-
Maximum negative sequence currents (I2max)
-
Maximum ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I21 max)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well.
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7.
In the case of the maximum value displays above, the measured quantity is averaged over a rolling
15 minute time window, and the maximum recorded average value is shown on the display screen.
The displayed power system quantities depend on relay model and its [APPL] setting as shown in
Table 3.4.1.
The zero sequence current Ie in “3P” setting of the model 420 is calculated from the three phase
input currents and the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is
displayed the current fed from CT.
⎯ 83 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4. User Interface
4.1
Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an
RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and
Monitoring), IEC61850 communication or IEC60870-5-103 communication via Ethernet LAN
port or RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree of
the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1
Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and RS-232C connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with a 2-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW
and RESET will display the menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for 5
minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED
There are 9 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label
Color
Remarks
IN SERVICE
Green
Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP
ALARM
(LED1)
(LED2)
(LED3)
(LED4)
(LED5)
(LED6)
Red
Red
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Lit when a trip command is issued.
Lit when a failure is detected.
Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
LED1 to LED6 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.
⎯ 84 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
c
,
,
,
: Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical
values and text strings.
d CANCEL :
Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
e END :
Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.
f ENTER :
Used to store or establish entries.
VIEW and RESET keys
Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication".
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.
Monitoring jacks
The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is
selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and
setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or transmitted to an
oscilloscope via a monitoring jack.
RS232C connector
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local
personal computer.
⎯ 85 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.1.2
Communication Ports
The following two interfaces are mounted as communication ports:
• RS232C port
• RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port for serial communication
• IRIG-B port
RS232C port
This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and is
mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting
operation and display functions can be performed. (See Figure 3.1.3.)
RS485, Fibre optic or Ethernet LAN port
The RS485 port or the fibre optic port is connected to the IEC60870-5-103 communication via
BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to connect between relays and to construct
a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.) The RS485 port is a screw
terminal and the fibre optic port is the ST connector.
Ethernet LAN port is connected to the substation automation system via Ethernet communication
networks using IEC 61850 protocol. This port can also be connected to the RSM. 100Base-TX
(T1: RJ-45 connector) or 100Base-FX (F1: SC connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided on the
back of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
IRIG-B port
The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from the external clock to synchronize the
relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
RS485 connection
terminal
TB3
TB1
Fibre Optic
(ST)
IRIG-B
TB2
OPT
T
TB1
R
TB3
IRIG-B
TB2
T1
F1
R
T
E
E
Rear view
(a) RS485 + 100BASE-TX
Rear view
(b) Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX
Figure 4.1.1 Location of Communication Port
⎯ 86 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.2
Operation of the User Interface
The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples of typical model.
4.2.1
LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation
When the GRD110 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
I Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication",
"Metering1", "Metering2", "Metering3", "Metering4", "Metering5", "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and
"Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The following are the digest
screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 ]
0 0 0 0 ]
Metering1
I a
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P
setting in models 400 and 420.
I b
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A
Not available for models 110, and APPL=1P
and 2P settings in models 400 and 420.
I c
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P
setting in models 400 and 420.
I e
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ k A
Metering2
Metering3
Metering4
Metering5
I s e
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ ∗ k A
Not available for models 400.
To clear the latched indications (latched LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault), press RESET key
for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 ]
0 0 0 0 ]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
⎯ 87 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s e
O C 1
A B C E
: Faulted phases. Not displayed for model 110
: Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and
other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off
the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning
off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the
RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other
digest screens. LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active
state.
Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation
LED lighting status
Operation
Step 1
"TRIP" LED
Press the RESET key more than 3s on
the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit
Step 2
Configurable LED
(LED1 – LED6)
turn off
Then, press the RESET key in short
period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function.
To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.
⎯ 88 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Displays in automatic supervision operation
Auto-supervision
E r r : R OM , A / D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an
alarm, press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET key
again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED6 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.
While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.
• Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
: A L M 1
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest
fault" screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
⎯ 89 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.2.2
Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRD110. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix E.
Menu
Record
F. record
E. record
D. record
Counter
Status
Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Set. (change)
Password
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Test
Switch
Binary O/P
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
⎯ 90 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, RSM, IEC60870-5-103 or
SNTP), clock adjustment and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, plant name and the current settings of relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to set or change the settings of password, plant name, relay
address, IP address and RS232C baud rate in communication, record, status, protection,
configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to set or change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
The "Test" menu also has password security protection.
When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.
•
•
•
•
•
R
S
S
S
T
e
t
e
e
e
M
c
a
t
t
s
E N U
o r d
t u s
.
( v i e w )
.
( c h a n g e )
t
To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to turn
off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that
lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
and
keys.
window, use the
/ 5
T r i p
s w
• S c h e m e
• P r o t . e l e m e n t
⎯ 91 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
E, press the END key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3
Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count, ΣIy count and reclose count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records
To display fault records, do the following:
• Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/
•
•
•
•
1
F
E
D
C
.
.
.
o
R
r
r
r
u
e
e
e
e
n
c
c
c
c
t
o
o
o
o
e
r
r
r
r
r
d
d
d
d
• Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.
/ 2
F . r e c o r d
• D i s p l a y
• C l e a r
• Select "Display" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the top
in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3
F . r e c o r d
# 1
1
1
2
1
0
1
2
0
# 2
# 3
# 4
6
8
0
5
4
1
8
7
/
:
/
:
/
:
/
:
J
1
M
2
F
5
J
3
u
3
a
9
e
4
a
0
l
:
y
:
b
:
n
:
/
5
/
2
/
5
/
1
2
7
2
2
2
3
2
8
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
0
0
1
0
2
0
4
1
3
1
0
1
9
1
1
1
1
9
2
• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
⎯ 92 ⎯
and
keys and press the
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
/
1
1
O
P
P
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
4
6
8
C
h
r
a
b
c
e
s
1
2
0
2
a
a
b
c
e
s
1
2
0
2
H
/
:
1
a
e
e
/
u
e
/
M
F . r e c o r d
# 1
O c t / 2 0 0 9
1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
Trip element
s e
A B
f a u l t
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗ .
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
I 1
∗ ∗
l t
v a
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗ .
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
I 1
∗ ∗
∗ ∗
C
.
.
.
.
∗
.
.
.
.
l
.
.
.
.
∗
.
.
.
.
∗
Not available for model 110.
v
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
u
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
.
a
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
e
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
l
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
u e s
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Not available for model 110 and APPL=1P setting in models 400 and 420.
Not available for models 110 and APPL=1P and 2P settings in models 400 and 420.
s
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
%
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the
and
keys.
To clear all the fault records, do the following:
• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.
• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
r e c o r d s ?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records
To display event records, do the following:
• Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.
/ 2
E . r e c o r d
• D i s p l a y
⎯ 93 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• C l e a r
• Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3
1
O
1
O
1
R
6
C
6
C
6
l
E . r e c o r d
/
1
/
1
/
y
O
O
O
.
c t / 2 0
A
t r i
c t / 2 0
A
c t / 2 0
c h a n
The time is displayed by pressing the
/ 3
1
O
1
O
1
R
Press the
8
C
8
C
8
l
0 9
p
0 9
O n
O n
0 9
g e
key.
E . r e c o r d
:
1
:
1
:
y
1
1
1
.
3 : 5 8 .
A
t r i
3 : 5 8 .
A
3 : 5 7 .
c h a n
2 5 5
p
O n
0 2 8
O n
7 7 3
g e
key to return the screen with date.
and
keys.
To clear all the event records, do the following:
C l e a r
E N D = Y
r e c o r d s ?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records
Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.
• Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.
/ 2
D . r e c o r d
• D i s p l a y
• C l e a r
• Select "Display" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
⎯ 94 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
/ 3
D . r e c o r d
# 1
1
1
2
1
0
1
2
0
# 2
# 3
# 4
6
8
0
5
4
1
8
7
/
:
/
:
/
:
/
:
O
1
S
2
J
5
F
3
c
3
e
9
u
4
e
0
t
:
p
:
l
:
b
:
/
5
/
2
/
5
/
1
2
7
2
2
2
3
2
8
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
.
0
4
0
3
0
4
0
8
9
0
9
8
9
4
9
7
1
8
4
6
and
keys.
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:
C l e a r
E N D = Y
r e c o r d s ?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter
• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2
C o u n t e r
• D i s p l a y
T r i p s
• C l e a r
C
l
e
a
r
T r i p s
A
(*)
•
T r i p s
B
(*)
• C l e a r
T r i p s
C
(*)
• C l e a r
• C l e a r
Σ I ^ y A
• C l e a r
Σ I ^ y B
• C l e a r
Σ I ^ y C
A R C s
• C l e a r
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
• Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/ 3
C o u n t e r
T r i p s
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
T r i p s A
(*)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
T r i p s B
(*)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
T r i p s C
(*)
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
Σ I ^ y A
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ E 6
Σ I ^ y B
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ E 6
Σ I ^ y C
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ E 6
A R C s
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
⎯ 95 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
and
keys.
To clear each count, do the following:
• Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
T r i p s ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
T r i p s
A ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
T r i p s
B ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
T r i p s
C ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Σ I^yA" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
Σ I ^ y A ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Σ I^yB" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
Σ I ^ y B ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear Σ I^yC" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
Σ I ^ y C ?
C A N C E L = N
• Select "Clear ARCs" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
A R C s ?
C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.4
Displaying the Status
From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
⎯ 96 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
The data are updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data
To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
M
B
R
T
C
L
e
i
e
i
l
C
S
t
n
l
m
o
D
t
e
a
a
e
c
a t u s
r i n g
r y
I /
y
e l e
s y n
k
a d j
c o n t r
O
m
c
u
a
e n t
.
s t .
s t
• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 2
M e t e r i n g
• M e t e r i n g
• D e m a n d
/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
2
M e t e r i
a
∗ ∗
b
∗ ∗
c
∗ ∗
e
∗ ∗
s e
∗ ∗
1
∗ ∗
2
∗ ∗
0
∗ ∗ .
2 / I 1
∗ ∗
H M
∗ ∗
n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
∗
.
∗
g
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
∗
.
K A
∗
K A
∗
K A
∗
K A
∗
∗ ∗ K A
K A
∗
K A
∗
k A
∗
%
∗
If the primary side unit (A) is required, select 2(=Pri-A) on the "Metering" screen. See Section
4.2.6.6.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
• Select "Demand" to display the current demand on the "Metering" screen.
/
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3
a
b
c
e
s
2
2
m
m
m
m
e
m
1
D
a
a
a
a
m
a
m
e m a n d
k
x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
k
x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
k
x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
k
x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
a x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ ∗ k
k
x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
a x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
A
A
A
A
A
A
To clear all max data, do the following:
• Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the
following confirmation screen.
C l e a r
E N D = Y
m a x ?
C A N C E L = N
⎯ 97 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
• Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/ 2
I P
O P
B i n a r y
I / O
0 0 0 0 ]
[ 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 ]
[ 0 0 0 0
The display format is shown below.
[

]
Input (IP)
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8
Output (OP)
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
FAIL
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at
the photo-coupler output circuit.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO7 are configurable. The status
of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay
driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
and
To display all the lines, press the
keys.
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements
To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
• Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/
O
O
E
S
N
U
T
B
C
I
C
2
C
C
F
E
O
C
H
C
B
C
L
R y
# 1 [
# 2 [
[
F
[
C
[
[
M [
D
[
F
[
D
[
P
[
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
e
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
l
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0 0
e m e n t
0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
]
0
]
0
]
]
0 0 0
]
]
]
0
]
]
0
]
The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[

OC#1
OC1-A OC1-B OC1-C OC2-A OC2-B
OC#2
OC4-A OC4-B OC4-C
EF
EF1
EF2
EF3

OC2-C
OC3-A
OC3-B
]
OC3-C OC elements
OC elements
EF4
EF elements
⎯ 98 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
[

SEF
SEF1 SEF2 SEF3
NOC
NOC1 NOC2
UC
THM
UC1-A UC1-B UC1-C
Alarm Trip
BCD

]
SEF4
SEF elements
NOC elements
UC2-A
UC2-B
UC2-C
THM element
BCD
CBF
ICD
CLP
UC elements
BCD element
CBF-A CBF-B CBF-C
ICD-A ICD-B ICD-C
0
1
2
CBFEF
CBF element
ICD element
Cold Load state
3
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source
The internal clock of the GRD110 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP server. To display on the LCD whether these clocks
are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the
following:
• Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2
B
I
I
∗ S
I
R
E
N
T i m e
:
A
I G : I n
C
: I n
T P : A c
s
c
a
a
t
y
t
c
c
.
n c .
.
t
.
t
.
( S r v 1 )
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment
To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
• Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2
M i
H o
D a
M o
Y e
1 2 / N o v / 2 0 0 9
2 2 : 5 6 : 1 9
L o c
n u t e
5 6
_
u r
2 2
y
1 2
n t h
1 1
a r
Loc:Local, BI:BI, IRI:IRIG-B, IEC:IEC103, SNT:SNTP
⎯ 99 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
2 0 0 9
Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [IRI], [IEC], [SNT] or [RSM] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
• Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast
To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2
L C D
c o n t r a s t
• Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by
pressing the key and deep by pressing the key.
4.2.5
Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version
To view the relay version, do the following.
• Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1
S e t . ( v i e w )
• V e r s i o n
⎯ 100 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
D
C
R
S
P
B
B
L
e
o
e
t
r
i
i
E
s
m
c
a
o
n
n
D
c
m
o
t
t
a
a
r
s
r
u
e
r
r
i p t i o n
d
s
c t i o n
y
I / P
y
O / P
• Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.
/ 2
V e r s i o n
t y p e
• R e l a y
N o .
• S e r i a l
• S o f t w a r e
• Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number.
G R D 1 1 0 - 4 0 0 D - 1 0
- A 0
• Select "Serial number" to display the relay manufacturing number.
• Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
s o f t w a r e
• M a i n
G S P D M 1 - 0 1 - ∗
• I
G
• P
P
(
• I
I
(
• I
X
(
• G
Y
(
E
∗
L
G
∗
E
G
∗
E
G
∗
O
G
∗
C
∗
C
R
∗
C
R
∗
C
R
∗
O
R
∗
6 1 8
∗ ∗ ∗
d a
D 1 1
∗ ∗ ∗
1 0 3
D 1 1
∗ ∗ ∗
6 1 8
D 1 1
∗ ∗ ∗
S E
Z 1 0
∗ ∗ ∗
5
t
0
∗
0
∗
5
0
∗
s
0
∗
0
∗
a
D
∗
d
D
∗
0
D
∗
u
D
∗
e n g .
∗ - ∗
∗
∗
a
∗
∗
∗
∗
b
∗
∗
∗
)
t
∗
)
d
∗
)
s
∗
)
∗ ∗
a
∗ ∗
a t a
∗ ∗
c .
∗ ∗
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" and
"LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6
Changing the Settings
The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Communication (Relay address, IP address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103)
Recording setting
Status setting
⎯ 101 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
Modification of settings :
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)
depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary
settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method
There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item
If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the
and
keys.
/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
P
D
C
R
S
P
B
B
L
a
e
o
e
t
r
i
i
E
S
s
s
m
c
a
o
n
n
D
e
s
c
m
o
t
t
a
a
t
w
r
s
r
u
e
r
r
. ( c h a n g e)
o r d
i p t i o n
d
s
c t i o n
y
I / P
y
O / P
• Move the cursor to a setting item.
• Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string
Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2
D e s c r i p t i o n
n a m e
• P l a n t
• D e s c r i p t i o n
⎯ 102 ⎯
and
keys.
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
To select a character, use keys , , and to move blinking cursor down, up, left and right. "
→ " and " ← " on each of lines 4, 8 and 10 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A
maximum of 22 characters can be entered.
_
A
H
O
V
a
h
o
v
0
7
(
}
>
‘
B
I
P
W
b
i
p
w
1
8
)
∗
!
:
C
J
Q
X
c
j
q
x
2
9
[
/
“
;
D
K
R
Y
d
k
r
y
3
]
+
#
,
E
L
S
Z
e
l
s
z
4
F G
M N
T U
←→
f g
m n
t u
←→
5 6
←→
@_ {
− < =
$ %&
. ˆ `
• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.
• Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.
• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:
• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To enter numerical values
When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
and
keys. If
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the
setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the
and
keys.
/ 4
T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m
2
O C
2
E F
0
S E F
0
N O C
0
e
. 0
s
_
A
. 0 0
A
. 6 0
A
. 2 0 0
A
. 4 0
• Move the cursor to a setting line.
• Press the
key.
or
key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the
⎯ 103 ⎯
or
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
and
keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper
one.
To complete the setting
Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the
"Set. (change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns back
to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far
and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2
Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
/ 2
P a s s w o r d
• S e t t i n g
• T e s t
• Select "Setting" to set the password for the setting change.
• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
I n p u t
[ _
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←
]
• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
R e t y p e
[ _
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←
⎯ 104 ⎯
]
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
• Select "Test" to set the password for the test.
Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.
P a s s w o r d
[ _
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←
]
Canceling or changing the password
To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRD110 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name
To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2
D e s c r i p t i o n
n a m e
• P l a n t
•
•
•
•
•
D
A
A
A
A
e
l
l
l
l
s
a
a
a
a
c
r
r
r
r
r
m
m
m
m
i p t i o n
1
T e x t
2
T e x t
3
T e x t
4
T e x t
• To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
• To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
• To enter the name for Alarm∗, select "Alarm∗" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E F G
⎯ 105 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
H
O
V
a
h
o
v
0
7
(
}
>
‘
I
P
W
b
i
p
w
1
8
)
∗
!
:
J
Q
X
c
j
q
x
2
9
[
/
“
;
K
R
Y
d
k
r
y
3
]
+
#
,
L
S
Z
e
l
s
z
4
M N
T U
←→
f g
m n
t u
←→
5 6
←→
@_ {
− < =
$ %&
. ˆ `
• Enter the text string (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication or Ethernet LAN, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2
C o m m s
.
• A d d r . / P a r a m .
• S w i t c h
• Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3
A d d r . / P a r a m
I E C
2
_
S Y A D J
m s
0
I P 1 1
I P 1 1
I P 1 I P 1 1
S M 1 2
S M 1 2
S M 1 2
S M 1 -
1
9
2
6
3
1
4
7
1
5
2
5
3
5
4
2
8
9
2
5
5
5
0
1
9 2
2
6 8
3
1 9
G W1 - 4
G W1 1
G W1 1
G W1 -
⎯ 106 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
1
:
:
S I 4 - 1
0
S I 4 - 2
0
S I 4 - 3
0
S I 4 - 4
0
S M O D E
0
D E A D T
1 2 0
G O I N T
6 0
P G 1 - 1
0
P G 1 - 2
0
P G 1 - 3
0
P G 1 - 4
0
P G 2 - 1
0
P G 2 - 2
0
P G 2 - 3
0
P G 2 - 4
0
•
m i n
s
Enter the address number on "IEC" column for IEC60870-5-103 and the compensation value
on "SYADJ" column for adjustment of time synchronization of protocol used (−: lags the time,
+: leads the time).
Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for
GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI4-4. Four SNTP servers are
available.
Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP
server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain
synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and
synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".
Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE
message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time.
Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG1-4 if Ping response is checked.
IP address: ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗
IP1-1 IP1-2 IP1-3 IP1-4
SM1-1 to SM1-4, GW1-1 to GW1-4, SI1-1 to SI4-4, PG1-1 to PG1-4: same as above.
• Press the ENTER key.
CAUTION: Do not overlap the relay address number.
• Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., of the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 or IEC61850.
⎯ 107 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
/ 3
2
9
I
9
I
N
8
N
8
O
T
O
G
O
P
O
3
.
E
.
E
o
5
o
5
f
S
f
S
f
I
f
S w i t c h
2
6
C
6
C
r
0
r
0
f
T
f
E
f
N
f
C
/
B
/
B
m
B
m
A
/
M
/
C
/
G
/
1
R
1
L
a
L
a
U
O
O
O
H
O
C
O
.
0
9 . 2 / 5 7 . 6
1
9 . 2
K
0
l / B l o c k e d
K
0
l / B l o c k e d
T
0
n
D
0
n
K
n
H K
n
• Select the number and press the ENTER key.
<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC60870-5-103 communication.
<850BLK>
Select 2 (=Blocked) to block the monitor direction for IEC61850 communication.
<850AUT>
With IEC61850 communication, GRD110 provides access restriction which permits a client
access only if an authentication parameter matches with a valid parameter (password). The
password is a 4-digit number shared with RSM100.
Select 1 (=On) to use the authentication function.
<TSTMOD>
Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.
<GSECHK>
This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file
cannot be received.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.
⎯ 108 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
<PINGCHK>
This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address
which is set on PG∗-∗.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.
<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system is applied.
Note: default setting of RS- 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
provide the user with an improved response during operation. The setting of RSM100 is also
set to the same baud rate.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function
To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/
•
•
•
2
R e
E . r e
D . r e
C o u n
c
c
c
t
o
o
o
e
r d
r d
r d
r
Setting the event recording
/ 3
E . r e c o r d
B I T R
1
E V 1
3 0
E V 2
3 0
E V 3
3 0
:
:
E V 1 2
3 1
E V 1 2
3 1
N
0 0
_
0 1
_
0 2
_
0 3
_
7
2 7
8
2 8
_
_
<BITRN>
Enter the number of event to record the status change both to "On" and "Off". If 20 is entered, both
status change is recorded for EV1 to EV20 events and only the status change to "On" is recorded
for EV21 to EV128 events.
<EV∗>
Enter the signal number in Appendix C to record as the event. It is recommended that this setting
can be performed by RSM100 because the signal name cannot be entered by LCD screen. (Refer
⎯ 109 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
to Section 3.4.2.)
Setting the disturbance recording
/
•
•
•
3
D .
T i m e
S c h e
B i n a
r
/
m
r
e c o r d
s t a r t e r
e
s w
y
s i g .
• Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.
/ 4
T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m
2
O C
2
E F
0
S E F
0
N O C
0
e
. 0
s
_
A
. 0 0
A
. 6 0
A
. 2 0 0
A
. 4 0
• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "D. record" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4
T
O
O
O
E
O
S
O
N
O
R
f
C
f
F
f
E
f
O
f
S c h e m e
s w
I P
f / O n
1
_
1
f / O n
1
f / O n
F
f / O n
C
f / O n
1
1
• Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.
To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
• Select "Binary sig." on the "D. record" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4
B i n a r y
S I G
3
S I G
3
S I G
3
1
0 0 1
2
0 0 2
3
0 0 3
s i g .
_
S I G 3 2
3 0 3 2
⎯ 110 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix C.
Setting the counter
/ 3
C o u n t e r
s w
• S c h e m e
• A l a r m s e t
To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4
T
O
C
O
T
O
Σ
O
O
O
C
f
B
f
C
f
I
f
P
f
S c h e m e
S
f
S
f
A
f
y
f
T
f
P
/
M
/
E
/
A
/
A
/
E
O
E
O
N
O
E
O
E
O
s w
N
0
_
n / O p t - O n
N
0
n
0
n
N
0
n
N
0
n
• Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.
To set threshold setting, do the following:
• Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4
T C
1
Σ I
1
Y V
A l a r m
A
0
y
0
A
L
0
A
0
L
2
O P T A
1 0
M
0
L
0
U
.
L
0
0
M
0
E
0
M
0
s e t
_
E 6
m s
• Enter the threshold settings.
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/
•
•
•
2
S t a t u s
M e t e r i n g
T i m e
s y n c .
T i m e
z o n e
Setting the metering
/ 3
M e t e r i n g
⎯ 111 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
D i s p l a y
1
_
P r i / S e c / P r i - A
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=Pri) to display the primary side current in kilo-amperes(kA).
Enter 1(=Sec) to display the secondary side current.
Enter 2(=Pri-A) to display the primary side current in amperes(A).
Setting the time synchronisation
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal, RSM clock, or
by an IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.
• Select "Time sync" to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3
T i m e
s y n c .
T i m e
s y n c
0
_
O f / B I / I R I / I E C / S N
• Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.
Enter 0(=of) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=IRI) to be synchronised with IRIG-B time signal.
Enter 3(=IEC) to be synchronised with IEC60870-5-103.
Enter 4(=SN) to be synchronised with SNTP.
Note: When selecting BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, check that they are active on the
"Status" screen in "Status" sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI, IRIG-B, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP, the calendar clock runs locally.
Setting the time zone
When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time.
• Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
/ 3
T i m e
z o n e
G M T
h r s
+ 9
_
G M T m
M i n
+ 0
• Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hrs) and
GMTm (min), and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRD110 can have 8 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
⎯ 112 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
• Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/
•
•
•
2
P r o t e
C h a n g e
C h a n g e
C o p y
g p
c t i o n
a c t . g p .
s e t .
.
Changing the active group
• Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3
C h a n g e
a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e
g p .
1
_
• Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings
Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix H. To change the settings, do the following:
• Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3
C
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
o
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
A
m
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
c
m
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
t
o
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
p
g p . = ∗
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Changing the Common settings
• Select "Common" to set the current and voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and
press the ENTER key.
/ 4
A
3
C
O
A
O
P
P
T
f
O
f
C o m m o n
P
/
S
f
L
f
L
2
V
/
E
/
P
E
A
D
O
0
_
/ 1 P
N
2
L M & B L K / A L M
1
n
GRD110-400 and -420
3 phase / 2 phase / 1 pole
for GRD110-400 and -420
<APPL>
• Enter 0(=Off: not used), 1(=3P: 3 phase), 2(=2P: 2 phase) or 3(=1P: 1 pole) to set the current
input state and press the ENTER key.
< CTSVEN>
To set AC input imbalance supervision enable, do the following.
⎯ 113 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=ALM&BLK) or 2(=ALM) by pressing the
ENTER key.
or
key and press the
<AOLED>
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.
• Enter 1 (=On) to light the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER
key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Changing the Group settings
• Select the "Group∗" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER
key.
/
•
•
•
4
G r o u p ∗
P a r a m e t e r
T r i p
A R C
Setting the parameter
Enter the line name and the CT ratio as follows:
• Select "Parameter" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5
P a r a m e t e r
n a m e
• L i n e
r a t i o
• C T
• Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.
• Enter the line name as a text string and press the EN D key. A maximum of 22 characters can
be entered.
• Select "CT ratio" to display the "CT ratio" screen.
/ 6
C T
r a t i o
O C C T
4 0 0
_
E F C T
4 0 0
S E F C T
4 0 0
Note: The "CT ratio" screen depends on the APPL setting.
In Model 420, the settings of OCCT and EFCT are set to the same value.
• Enter the CT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function
To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
• Select "Trip" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5
T r i p
s w
• S c h e m e
e l e m e n t
• P r o t .
⎯ 114 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Setting the scheme switch
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6
A
O
E
S
N
M
C
p
C
F
E
O
i
o
S c h e m e
s w
p l i c a t i o n
F
C
s c
l d
L o a d
Setting the application
To set the application setting, do the following.
• Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/ 7
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
M
D
O
/
O
/
E
/
E
/
S
/
S
/
N
/
N
/
A p p l i c a t i o n
C
I
C
I
F
I
F
I
E
I
E
I
C
I
C
I
1
E
2
E
1
E
2
E
1
E
2
E
1
E
2
E
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
0
C / I E E E / U
_
S / C
_
S / C
S / C
S / C
S / C
S / C
_
S / C
_
S / C
<MOC1, 2>, <MEF1, 2>, <MSE1, 2>, <MNC1, 2>
To set the OC1, OC2, EF1, EF2, SEF1, SEF2, NOC1 and NOC2 time delay characteristic type, do
the following.
• Enter 0(=D: DT) or 1(=IEC) or 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US) or 4(=C: CON) and press the ENTER
key.
Setting the OC protection
The settings for the OC protection are as follows:
• Select "OC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OC" screen.
/ 7
O
O
M
N
M
M
M
C
f
O
I
O
I
O
O C
1
f
C
/
C
/
C
E
/
1
V
1
V
1
N
O
C
I
C
I
C
1
n
/
/
-
I
E
I
E
U
E C
0
I / L T I
E E E
0
I
S
0
⎯ 115 ⎯
_
This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 1(=IEC).
This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE).
This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 3(=US).
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
C
O
D
O
N
O
O
O
C
E
C
A
C
f
2
1
F
1
/
2
f
/
R
/
B
E
/
C O 8
D
2
l
N
O
O
O
O
N
O
O
C
f
C
A
C
f
3
f
3
/
4
f
E
/
B
E
/
N
O
2
l
N
O
0
E P
F
o c k
0
n
:
:
0
n
F
o c k
0
n
:
:
O C T P
0
3 P O R / 2 O U T O F 3
<OC∗EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC∗, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<MOC1C>, <MOC2C>
To set the OC1 and OC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MOC∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
• If [MOC∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
• If [MOC∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<OC1R>, <OC2R>
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
• If [MOC∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
<OC1-2F>, <OC2-2F>, <OC3-2F>, <OC4-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4 against the inrush current, and press
the ENTER key.
<OCTP>
To set the trip mode, do the following.
• Enter 0(=3POR) or 1(=2OUTOF3) and press the ENTER key. If the “2OUTOF3” selected,
the trip signal is not issued when only one phase element operates.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
⎯ 116 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the EF protection
The settings for the EF protection are as follows:
• Select the "EF" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/ 7
E F
E
O
M
N
M
M
M
C
E
D
E
N
E
O
F
f
E
I
E
I
E
O
F
E
F
A
F
f
1
f
F
/
F
/
F
2
1
F
1
/
2
f
E
/
1
V
1
V
1
/
R
/
B
E
/
N
O
C
I
C
I
C
C
D
2
l
N
O
E
O
E
N
E
O
E
N
F
f
F
A
F
f
F
A
3
f
3
/
4
f
4
/
E
/
B
E
/
B
N
O
2
l
N
O
2
l
n
/
/
O
/
I
E
I
E
U
8
P
E
I
E
I
S
1
O P
C
0
/ L T I
E E
0
_
0
This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 1(=IEC).
This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE).
This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 3(=US).
0
E P
F
o c k
0
n / P O P
:
:
0
n / P O P
F
o c k
0
n
F
o c k
<EF∗EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to use an earth fault protection, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF∗,
enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<MEF1C>, <MEF2C>
To set the EF1 and EF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MEF∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
• If [MEF∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
• If [MEF∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<EF1R>, <EF2R>
• If [MEF∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
⎯ 117 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
<EF1-2F>, <EF2-2F>, <EF3-2F>, <EF4-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the EF1, EF2, EF3 and EF4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the SEF protection
The settings for the SEF protection are as follows:
• Select "SEF" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "SEF" screen.
/ 7
S E F
S
O
M
N
M
M
M
C
S
D
S
O
S
N
S
O
E
f
S
I
S
I
S
O
E
E
E
f
E
A
E
f
1
f
E
/
E
/
E
2
1
F
1
f
1
/
2
f
E
/
1
V
1
V
1
/
R
/
S
/
B
E
/
N
O
C
I
C
I
C
C
D
2
O
2
l
N
O
S
O
S
N
S
O
S
N
E
f
E
A
E
f
E
A
3
f
3
/
4
f
4
/
E
/
B
E
/
B
N
O
2
l
N
O
2
l
1
n
/
/
O
I
E
I
E
U
8
E C
0
I / L T I
E E E
0
I
S
0
_
This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 1(=IEC).
This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE).
This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 3(=US).
0
E P
0
n
F
o c k
0
n
:
:
0
n
F
o c k
0
n
F
o c k
<SE∗EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF∗, enter
<MSE1C>, <MSE2C>
To set the SEF1 and SEF2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MSE∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
⎯ 118 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• If [MSE∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
• If [MSE∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<SE1R>, <SE2R>
• If [MSE∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
<SE1S2>
To set the Stage 2 Timer Enable, do the following.
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter
<SE1-2F>, <SE2-2F>, <SE3-2F>, <SE4-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the SEF1, SEF2, SEF3 and SEF4 against the inrush current, and press
the ENTER key.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the NOC protection
The settings for the NOC protection are as follows:
• Select the "NOC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NOC" screen.
/ 7
N
O
M
N
M
M
M
C
N
D
N
N
N
O
C
f
N
I
N
I
N
O
C
E
C
A
C
f
N O C
1
f
C
/
C
/
C
2
1
F
1
/
2
f
E
/
1
V
1
V
1
/
R
/
B
E
/
N
O
C
I
C
I
C
C
1
n
/
/
O
I
E
I
E
U
8
E C
0
I / L T I
E E E
0
I
S
0
_
This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 1(=IEC).
This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 2(=IEEE).
This setting is displayed if [MNC1] is 3(=US).
0
D
2
l
N
O
E P
F
o c k
0
n
:
:
N C 1 - 2 F
N A / B l o c k
<NC∗EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the NC∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NC∗, enter
⎯ 119 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
<MNC1C>, <MNC2C>
To set the NOC1 and NOC2 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MNC∗] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
• If [MNC∗] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
• If [MNC∗] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<NC1R>, <NC2R>
• If [MNC∗] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
<NC1-2F>, <NC2-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the NOC1 and NOC2 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the Misc. protection
The settings for the miscellaneous protection are as follows:
• Select "Misc." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7
U
O
U
O
T
O
T
O
B
O
B
N
C
O
C
O
B
O
R
O
C
f
C
f
H
f
H
f
C
f
C
A
B
f
B
f
T
f
T
f
M i s c .
1
f
2
f
M
f
M
f
D
f
D
/
F
f
F
f
C
f
C
f
E
/
E
/
E
/
A
/
E
/
B
O
/
E
/
N
O
N
O
N
O
E
O
N
O
2
l
C
O
F
O
0
n
0
n
0
n
N
n
0
0
n
F
o c k
E N
n
E N
n
0
0
0
/ O n
0
/ D I R / O C
⎯ 120 ⎯
_
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
<UC∗EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the UC∗ and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UC∗, enter
<THMEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal OL and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal
OL, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<THMAEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal Alarm and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Thermal Alarm, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<BCDEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Broken Conductor and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Broken Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<BCD-2F>
• Enter 1(=Block) to block the BCD against the inrush current, and press the ENTER key.
<CBFOCEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the CBFOC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Broken
Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<CBFEFEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the CBFEF and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Broken
Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<BTC>
• Enter 1(=On) to set the Back-trip control and press the ENTER key. If not setting the
Back-trip control, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<RTC>
To set the Re-trip control, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=Direct) or 2(=OC controlled) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the Cold Load protection
The settings for the Cold Load protection are as follows:
• Select "Misc." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7
C o l d
L o a d
C L E N
O f f / O n
C L D O E N
0
0
⎯ 121 ⎯
_
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
O f f / O n
<CLEN>
To set the Cold load function enable, do the following.
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load function and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<CLDOEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load drop-off and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load drop-off, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the protection elements
To set the protection elements, do the following.
• Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/
•
•
•
•
•
•
6
O
E
S
N
M
C
P r o t . e l e m e n t
C
F
E
O
i
o
F
C
s c
l d
L o a d
Setting the OC elements
• Select "OC" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OC" screen.
/ 7
O C 1
1
T O C
1
T O C
1 .
T O C
0
T O C
1 .
O C 2
5
T O C
1
T O C
1 .
T O C
0
T O C
O C
A
.
1
.
1
0
1
.
1
0
0 0
s
0
M
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
s
M
0
A
.
2
.
2
0
2
.
2
0 0
s
0 0
M
0 0
R
0
R M
s
⎯ 122 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
1
O C
1
T O
O C
2
T O
O C
0
O C
O C
0
O C
0
O C
O C
0
O C
.
3
0
C
0
4
0
C
0
1
.
1
0
1
.
1
.
1
0
2
.
0 0 0
A
. 0 0
3
. 0 0
s
A
.
4
.
0
.
0
0
.
0
0 0
s
0
k
0
α
0
C
0
k
0
β
0
k
0
:
:
2 - β
0 . 0
0
OC1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0
ditto
ditto
0
OC2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the EF elements
• Select "EF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/ 7
E F 1
0
T E F
1 .
T E F
1
T E F
T
E
T
E
T
E F
.
1
0
1
.
1
0
E F 1
1 . 0
F 2
3 .
E F 2
1 .
F 3
5 .
E F 3
0 .
A
3 0
M
0 0
_
s
0
R
.
R
0
0
s
0
M
0
A
0 0
s
0 0
A
0 0
s
0 0
⎯ 123 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
E F 4
1 0 .
T E F 4
0 .
E F 1 0 . 0
E F 1 0 .
E F 1 0 . 0
E F 1 0 . 0
E F 1 0 .
E F 2 0 . 0
A
0 0
s
0
k
0
α
0
C
0
k
0
β
0
k
0
:
:
E F 2 - β
0 . 0
0
EF1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0
ditto
ditto
0
EF2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the SEF elements
• Select "SEF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "SEF" screen.
/ 7
S E F
S E 1
0 . 0
T S E 1
1 .
T S E 1
1 . 0
T S E 1
0
T S E 1
1 . 0
T S 1 S
0 .
S E 2
0 . 0
T S E 2
1 .
T S E 2
1 . 0
T S E 2
0
T S E 2
1 . 0
S E 3
A
1 0
s
0
M
0
R
.
R
0
2
0
0
0
s
0
M
0
s
0
A
1 0
s
0
M
0
R
.
R
0
0
0
s
0
M
0
A
⎯ 124 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
0 . 0
T S E 3
0 .
S E 4
0 . 0
T S E 4
0 .
S E 1 0 . 0
S E 1 0 .
S E 1 0 . 0
S E 1 0 . 0
S E 1 0 .
S E 2 0 . 0
1 0
s
0 0
A
10
s
0
k
0
α
0
C
0
k
0
β
0
k
0
:
:
S E 2 - β
0 . 0
0
SE1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0
ditto
ditto
0
SE2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the NOC elements
• Select "EF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/ 7
N C 1
0
T N C
1
T N C
1 .
T N C
T
N
T
T
T
T
N O C
.
1
.
1
0
1
0
N C 1
1 . 0
C 2
0 .
N C 2
1 .
N C 2
1 . 0
N C 2
0
N C 2
1 . 0
A
4 0
s
0
M
0
R
.
R
0
0
0
s
0
M
0
A
2 0
s
0
M
0
R
.
R
0
0
0
s
0
M
0
⎯ 125 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
N C 1 - k
0 . 0 0
N C 1 - α
0 . 0
N C 1 - C
0 . 0 0
N C 1 - k
0 . 0 0
N C 1 - β
0 . 0
N C 2 - k
0 . 0 0
:
:
N C 2 - β
0 . 0
NC1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
ditto
0
r
0
ditto
ditto
0
NC2 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0
ditto
0
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the Misc. protection elements
• Select "Misc." on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7
U C 1
0
T U C
1
U C 2
0
T U C
1
T H M
1
T H M
0
T T H
1
T H M
M i s c .
A
. 2 0
1
. 0 0
_
s
A
. 4 0
2
. 0 0
s
A
.
I
.
M
0
A
0 0
P
0 0
A
m i n
. 0
%
8 0
B C D
0
T B C
1
C B F
0
C B F
0
T B T
0
T R T
. 2 0
D
. 0 0
s
A
.
E
.
C
.
C
5 0
F
5 0
A
s
5 0
s
⎯ 126 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
0 . 4
I C D - 2
1
I C D O C
0 . 1
0
f
5
%
A
0
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the Cold Load protection elements
• Select "Cold Load" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Cold Load" screen.
/ 7
O C 1
2
O C 2
5
O C 3
2 0
O C 4
4 0
E F 1
2
E F 2
5
E F 3
2 0
E F 4
4 0
S E 1
0 .
S E 2
0 .
S E 3
0 .
S E 4
0 .
N C 1
0
N C 2
0
B C D
0
T C L
1
T C L
1
I C L
0
T C L
0
C o l d
l o a d
A
. 0 0
_
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
. 0 0
A
0 2 0
A
0 2 0
A
0 2 0
A
0 2 0
A
. 8 0
A
. 4 0
.
E
0
R
0
D
.
D
.
4 0
s
0
s
0
O
5 0
O
0 0
A
s
⎯ 127 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
Setting the autoreclose function
To set the autoreclose function, do the following.
• Select "ARC" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "ARC" screen.
/ 5
A R C
s w
• S c h e m e
e l e m e n t
• A R C
Setting the scheme switch
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "ARC" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/
•
•
•
•
•
6
G
O
E
S
M
S c h e m e
e n e r a l
C
F
E F
i s c
s w
<General>
• Select "General" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose mode.
/ 7
A
O
A
S
R
f
R
1
G e n e r a l
C
f
C
/
E
/
S
N
0
_
O n
N U M
0
2 / S 3 / S 4 / S 5
ARCEN
• Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or to disable the autoreclose.
ARC-NUM
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 to set the number of shot.
Enter 0 (= S1) to perform single-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 1 (= S2) to perform two-shot autoreclosing..
Enter 2 (= S3) to perform three-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 3 (= S4) to perform four-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 4 (= S5) to perform five-shot autoreclosing.
<OC>, <EF>, <SEF>
• Select "OC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose initiation and trip mode of OC
protection.
⎯ 128 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
/ 7
O
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
A
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
C
O
C
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
C
f
O
f
O C
1
/
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
:
:
4
4
f
4
f
4
f
4
f
4
f
4
f
O
f
O
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
I
n
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
N
/
1
n
2
n
3
n
4
n
5
n
6
n
I T
0
B l o c k
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
2
s t / S e t
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
T
/
R
/
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
P
I
D
o
N
1
n
2
n
3
n
4
n
5
n
6
n
n
I T
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
s t / S e
O C
_
2
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
2
t
0
• Enter 1(=INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the OC1 trip in
"OC1-INIT". To neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
• Enter 1(=Inst) or 2(=Set) to set the OC1 first trip to “Instantaneous trip” or “Set time delay trip”
in the "OC1-TP1". To not use the OC1 trip, enter 0(=Off).
Note: OC1-TP2 to OC1-TP6 show the OC1 second trip to OC1 sixth trip.
For OC2 to OC4, the settings are same as OC1.
• Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or to disable the co-ordination for "COOD-OC" and press
the ENTER key.
After changing settings, press the ENTER key.
The setting method for EF and SEF is same as that of OC above.
<Misc>
• Select "Misc" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the external initiation of the autoreclose.
/ 7
M i s c
E X T - I N I T
0
N A / O n / B l o c k
⎯ 129 ⎯
_
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Enter 1(=On: INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the external trip. To
neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
Setting ARC element
• Select "ARC element" on the "Group ∗" screen to set timer setting and the threshold setting of
OC, EF and SEF for co-ordination.
/ 6
A R C
e l e m e n t
T R D
6
T D 1
1 0
T R 1
3 1 0
:
:
T D 5
1 0
T R 5
3 1 0
T W
2
T S U
3
T R C
1 0
T A R
1 0
T R S
3
O C 1
E F 0
S E 0 .
Y
0 . 0
_
s
s
. 0 0
s
. 0 0
s
. 0 0
s
. 0 0
s
.
C
.
O
.
C
.
E
.
C
.
C
.
C
0
0 0
s
0
V
0
P
0
T
0
O
0
O
3
O
1
0
s
0
s
0
s
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
C h a n g e
s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.
Setting group copy
To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
• Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3
C o p y
A
t o
A
B
_
⎯ 130 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
B
• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input
The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
• Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B i n a r y
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I / P
Selection of Binary Input
• Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.
/ 3
B I ∗
• T i m e r s
• F u n c t i o n s
Setting timers
• Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4
T i m e r s
P U D
0 . 0 0
D O D
0 . 0 0
s
Pick-up delay setting
s
Drop-off delay setting
_
• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.
Setting Functions
• Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4
F u n c t i o n s
S N S
N o r m / I n v
1
_
• To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.
⎯ 131 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.2.6.9
Binary Output
All the binary outputs of the GRD110 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix C.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix H shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay
•
Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
B i n a r y
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O / P
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #6 in assigning signals.
• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗"
screen.
/ 3
B O ∗
• L o g i c / R e s e t
Setting the logic gate type and timer
• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4
L
O
R
I
o
R
e
n
L o g i c / R e s e t
g
/
s
s
i
A
e
/
c
0
_
N D
t
0
D l / D w / L a t
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing
and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
⎯ 132 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4
I n
I n
I n
I n
I n
I n
T B
F u n c t i o n s
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
#
1 0
O
0 .
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
0
_
1
2
3
4
5
s
2 0
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #6) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 471 to 477 (signal names: "BO1
OP" to "BO7 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Six LEDs of the GRD110 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be
viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix C can be assigned to
each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2
L E D
• L E D
• V i r t u a l
L E D
Selection of real LEDs
• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/
•
•
•
•
•
•
3
L
L
L
L
L
L
E
E
E
E
E
E
L
D
D
D
D
D
D
E D
1
2
3
4
5
6
⎯ 133 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.
/ 4
L E D ∗
• L o g i c / R e s e t
Setting the logic gate type and reset type
• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 5
L
O
R
I
o
R
e
n
L o g i c / R e s e t
g
/
s
s
i
A
e
t
c
N D
t
/ L a t c h
0
_
0
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5
I n
F u n c t i o n s
#
1 0
I n
#
1 0
I n
#
1 0
I n
#
1 0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
0
_
1
2
3
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.
Selection of virtual LEDs
• Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3
V i r t u a l
• I N D 1
• I N D 2
L E D
• Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND∗" screen.
/ 4
I N D ∗
• R e s e t
⎯ 134 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Setting the reset timing
• Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5
R e s e t
R e s e t
I n s t / L a t c h
0
_
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "IND∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5
F u n c t i o n s
B I T
1
B I T
1
1
0 0 0
2
0 0 1
_
B I T 8
1 0 0 7
• Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix C.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.
4.2.7
Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to enter the test
screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.) If the
password trap ser, enter the password in the following screen.
P a s s w o r d
[ _
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ←
]
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a lighting state.
4.2.7.1 Scheme Switch
The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
⎯ 135 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
• Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/
•
•
•
1
T e
S w i t
B i n a
L o g i
s t
c h
r y
O / P
c
c i r c u i t
• Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.
/ 2
A
O
C
O
T
O
S
O
I
O
.
f
L
f
H
f
H
f
E
f
S w i t c h
M
f
P
f
M
f
O
f
C
f
.
/
T
/
R
/
T
/
T
/
F
O
S
S
S
O
N
S
S
O
.
n
T
0 / S 3
T
n
U M
1 - S 6
T
n
1
_
0
0
0
0
• Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=State0) or 2(=State3) to set forcibly the test condition of the Cold Load
Protection (CLPTST) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 1(=On) to set the reset delay time of the thermal overload element to instantaneous reset
for testing (THMRST) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=S1) or 2(=S2) or 3(=S3) or 4(=S4) or 5(=S5) to set shot number
(SHOTNUM) for autoreclose test and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay
It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
B i n a r y
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s
5
O / P
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
⎯ 136 ⎯
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
D
B
D
B
D
F
D
i
O
i
O
i
A
i
s
6
s
7
s
I
s
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
L
0
a b l e / E n a b
l e
_
l e
_
l e
_
l e
• Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
• Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.7.3 Logic Circuit
It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix C with monitoring
jacks A and B.
• Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
/ 2
L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1
_
T e r m B
1 0 0 1
_
• Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER key.
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.
⎯ 137 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.3
Personal Computer Interface
The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
• Display of current and voltage waveforms:
Oscillograph display
• Symmetrical component analysis:
On arbitrary time span
• Harmonic analysis:
• Frequency analysis:
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4
The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via Ethernet LAN networks using a remote PC as shown in Figure 4.4.1.
TCP/IP
(LAN cable)
Figure 4.4.1
HUB
⎯ 138 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.5
IEC 60870-5-103 Interface
The GRD110 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
• Measurand data: current
• Status data:
events, fault indications, etc.
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port or the Fibre optic port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors 1.2
and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.
4.6
IEC 61850 Communication
GRD110 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard. Station bus
communication as specified in IEC 61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within
substation control and automation systems via Ethernet LAN.
Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC
61850 communication.
Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network
⎯ 139 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.7
Clock Function
The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
• Event records
• Disturbance records
• Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP for IEC61850 etc. This can be
selected by setting (see 4.2.6.6.).
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the BI (connected to
PLC input No.2576 SYNC_CLOCK) by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or
“OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is
achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if
the synchronising BI signal is input every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
n sec
(n+1) sec
500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and selected "RSM"
in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM
clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the relay clocks
are synchronised with the external time standard.
⎯ 140 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
5. Installation
5.1
Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2
Relay Mounting
A flush mounting relay is included. Appendix F shows the case outline.
For details of relay withdrawal and insertion, see Section 6.7.3.
5.3
Electrostatic Discharge
CAUTION
Do not take out the relay unit outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
5.4
Handling Precautions
A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability
of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing the relay unit unnecessarily.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to
preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and
manufactured.
CAUTION
• Before removing the relay unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the
equipment by touching the case.
• Use the handle to draw out the relay unit. Avoid touching the electronic components,
printed circuit board or connectors.
• Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
• Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
• Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
⎯ 141 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried
out in a Special Handling Area.
5.5
External Connections
External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.
⎯ 142 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6. Commissioning and Maintenance
6.1
Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRD110 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:
On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
Reclosing circuit test
⎯ 143 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.2
Cautions
6.2.1
Safety Precautions
CAUTION
• The relay rack is provided with an earthing terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is earthed.
• When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided on top of it.
• Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
6.2.2
Precautions for Testing
CAUTION
• While the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit.
• Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
• Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
⎯ 144 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.3
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase current source
1 Three-phase current source
1 DC power supply
3 AC ammeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
⎯ 145 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.4
Hardware Tests
The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC current source
are required.
6.4.1
User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD display
• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "Err: " screen when the DC voltage is applied.
• Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that black dots appear on the whole
screen.
LED display
• Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
• Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that remaining five LEDs are lit in
red or yellow. (Programmable LEDs are yellow.)
VIEW and RESET keys
• Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Virtual LED" and "Metering"
screens are sequentially displayed on the LCD.
• Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.
Other operation keys
• Press any key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MENU" screen. Press
the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Repeat this for all keys.
6.4.2
Binary Input Circuit
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
⎯ 146 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
GRD110
TB2
- A1
- B1
- A8
DC
power
supply
+
TB2
−
- B8
-A9
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8
- B9
E
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/ 2
I P
O P
B i n a r y
I / O
0 0 0 0 ]
[ 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 ]
[ 0 0 0 0
• Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A1-B1, A2-B2, ..., A8-B8 of terminal block TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.
6.4.3
Binary Output Circuit
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays
the name of the output relay.
/ 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
F
D
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
A
i
B i n a r y
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s
5
s
6
s
7
s
I
s
O / P
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
L
0
a b l e / E n a b
⎯ 147 ⎯
_
l e
l e
l e
l e
l e
l e
l e
l e
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.
• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4
AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and
verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2. A single-phase current source is required.
GRD110
TB1 -1
A
Single-phase
current
source
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
DC
power
supply
Ia
-2
+
TB2 -A9
−
-B9
Ib
Ic
IN
E
Note:
AC input terminal numbers depends on model.
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the followings.
"Set. (view)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0(= Primary), change the setting to 1(=Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen
• Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within ±5% of the input values.
⎯ 148 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.5
Function Test
CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1
Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A
or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to
each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.
/ 2
L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1
_
T e r m B
4 8
_
When a signal number is entered for the Term A line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A
and when entered for the Term B line, it is observed at monitoring jack B.
Note:
The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for
logic level "0".
CAUTION
• Use test equipment with more than 1 kΩ of internal impedance when observing the output
signal at the monitoring jacks.
• Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
• Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter.
Note: Operating time test of measuring relay elements at monitoring jack A or B is not
including the operation of binary output. Whole the operating time test, if required,
should be measured at a binary output relay.
⎯ 149 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.5.1.1
Overcurrent and undercurrent element OC1 to OC4, UC1, UC2 and CBF and Earth fault
element EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4
The overcurrent element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
Operating current check
Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The operating current value is checked by increasing or
decreasing the magnitude of the current applied.
GRD110
+
Single-phase
current
source
−
TB1 -(*)
A
-(*)
Monitoring
jack
A
0V
DC
power
supply
+
TB2 -A9
−
-B9
E
DC
voltmeter
+
0V
(∗): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
Figure 6.5.1 Operating Current Value Test
The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.
The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
Element
Signal No.
OC1-A
51
EF1
63
SEF1
67
UC1-A
71
OC2-A
54
EF2
64
SEF2
68
UC2-A
74
OC3-A
57
EF3
65
SEF3
69
CBF-A
82
OC4-A
60
EF4
66
SEF4
70
CBFEF
100
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
• Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
⎯ 150 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Operating time check for IDMT curve
GRD110
A
Single-phase
current
source
TB1 (∗)
- ( ∗)
Monitoring
jack
DC
power
supply
+
TB2 -A9
−
-B9
A
0V
E
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(∗): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
Figure 6.5.2 Testing IDMT
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element
Signal No.
OC1-A
101
EF1
131
SEF1
141
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MOC1, MEF1 or MSE1 on the
"OC", "EF" or "SEF" screen.
Example: "Settings" sub-menu → "Protection" screen → "Group∗" screen → "OC" screen
The test procedure is as follows:
•
Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
•
Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 × Is to 20 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
•
Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. (For the accuracy, refer to Appendix K.)
If checking the dependent time reset characteristic, use the output signal numbers 576 to 587
(∗∗∗∗_DEPRST). These signals output “1”(logic level) when the value of internal time delay
counter is down to “0” in Figure 6.5.3 “Dependent time reset characteristic in accordance with IEC
60255-151”.
⎯ 151 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Signal “∗∗∗∗_DEPRST” outputs “1”.
Signal “∗∗∗∗_DEPRST” outputs “1”.
Figure 6.5.3
Dependent time reset characteristic
6.5.1.2 Thermal overload element THMA and THMT
The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.2.
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.
Element
Signal No.
THMA
77
THMT
78
To test easily the thermal overload element, the scheme switch [THMRST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used.
• Set the scheme switch [THMRST] to "ON".
• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current
should be between 1.2 × Is to 10 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has
become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.4. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
⎯ 152 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.5.1.3 Negative sequence overcurrent element NOC1 and NOC2
GRD110
Ia
TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase
Current
source
Ib
-3
A
-4
Ic
-5
A
-6
DC
power
supply
+
TB2 -A9
−
-B9
E
Figure 6.5.4 Testing NOC elements
Element
Signal No.
NOC1
79
NOC2
80
• Apply the three-phase balance current and the operating current value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the current applied.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
⎯ 153 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.5.1.4 Broken conductor detection element BCD
GRD110
Ia
TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase
current
source
Ib
-3
A
-4
Ic
-5
A
-6
DC
power
supply
+
TB2 -A9
−
-B9
E
Figure 6.5.5 Testing BCD element
Element
Signal No.
BCD
81
• Apply the three-phase balance current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.
Then, check the BCD element operates.
6.5.1.6 Cold load protection
The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.
To check the cold load protection function, the scheme switch [CLPTST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used.
• Set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S0".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of normal setting group.
• Next, set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S3".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of cold load setting group [CLSG].
⎯ 154 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.5.2
Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays.
Circuit Breaker failure tripping
• Set the scheme switch [BTC] to "ON" and [RTC] to "DIR" or "OC".
• Apply a fault, retain it and input an external trip signal. Check that the retrip output relays
operate after the time setting of the TCBF1 and the adjacent breaker tripping output relay
operates after the time setting of the TCBF2.
6.5.3
Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "F. record" screen
and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix C. There are internal events and external events by binary
input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the status of
binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test
(see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "E. Record" screen is correct.
Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "D. record" screen and
check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details
on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
⎯ 155 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.6
Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1
On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current transformers, check the load current with the metering
displays on the LCD screen.
• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the load current.
Note:
6.6.2
/ 2
M e t e r i n g
I a
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I b
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I c
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I e
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I s e
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ ∗ K A
I 1
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I 2
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I 2 / I 1
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
T H M
%
∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗
I a m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I b m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I c m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I e m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I s e m a x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ ∗ K A
I 2 m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I 2 1 m a x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by
the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)
Tripping Circuit Test
The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
• Set the breaker to be closed.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
B i n a r y
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s
5
s
6
O / P
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
⎯ 156 ⎯
_
l e
l e
l e
l e
l e
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 7
0
BO1 to BO7 are output relays with one normally open contact.
• Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
• Repeat the above for BO2 to BO7.
⎯ 157 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.6
Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1
On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current transformers, check the load current with the metering
displays on the LCD screen.
• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the load current.
Note:
6.6.2
/ 2
M e t e r i n g
I a
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I b
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I c
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I e
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I s e
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ ∗ K A
I 1
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I 2
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I 2 / I 1
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
T H M
%
∗ ∗ ∗ . ∗
I a m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I b m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I c m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I e m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I s e m a x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗ ∗ K A
I 2 m a x
K A
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
I 2 1 m a x
∗ ∗ . ∗ ∗
The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by
the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)
Tripping Circuit Test
The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
• Set the breaker to be closed.
/ 2
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
D
B
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
i
O
B i n a r y
1
s
2
s
3
s
4
s
5
s
6
O / P
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
a b l e / E n a b
0
⎯ 158 ⎯
_
l e
l e
l e
l e
l e
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
B O 7
0
BO1 to BO7 are output relays with one normally open contact.
• Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y
C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
• Repeat the above for BO2 to BO7.
Reclosing circuit
• Ensure that the circuit breaker is open.
• Select the BO number which is an autoreclose command output relay with one normally open
contact.
Note: The autoreclose command is assigned to any of the output relays by the user setting
• Operate the BO by the same manner as above.
⎯ 159 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6.7
Maintenance
6.7.1
Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2
Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message
Relay Unit
Err: SUM
Err: ROM
Err: RAM
Err: CPU
Err: Invalid
Err: NMI
Err: BRAM
Err: EEP
Err: A/D
Err: SP
Err: DC
Err: TC
×(Flash memory)
×(ROM data)
×(SRAM)
×(CPU)
×
×
×(Backup RAM)
×(EEPROM)
×(A/D converter)
×(Sampling)
×(DC power supply circuit)
×(Tripping circuit)(1)
Err: CT
× (AC input circuit)(1)
Err: CB
× (Circuit breaker)(1)
Failure location
CB or
AC cable
cable
PLC, IEC61850 data
× (2)
× (2)
× (2)
Err: PLC
×(PLC data)
Err: MAP
×(IEC61850 mapping data)
Err: RTC
×(SNTP setting)
Err: LAN
×(Ethernet LAN)
Err: GOOSE
×(GOOSE subscribe)
Err: Ping
×(Ping response)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC
power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit
in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.
⎯ 160 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3
Replacing Failed Relay Unit
If the failure is identified to be in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component level
is not recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software
type form) as the removed relay.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit
CAUTION
After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.
The procedure of relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:
• Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•
•
•
•
•
Disconnect the trip outputs.
Short-circuit all AC current inputs.
Unscrew the relay front cover.
Unscrew the binding screw on the handle.
To remove the relay unit from its case, pull up the handle and pull the handle towards you. (See
Figure 6.7.1.)
• Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.
CAUTION
To avoid risk of damage:
• Keep the handle up when inserting the relay unit into the case.
• Do not catch the handle when carrying the relay unit.
• Check that the relay unit and its case have the identical Model Number
when inserting the relay unit.
⎯ 161 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
A
IN SERVICE
VIEW
TRIP
ALARM
IN SERVICE
VIEW
TRIP
ALARM
RESET
RESET
B
0V CAN ENTER
CEL
A
B
END
0V CAN ENTER
CEL
END
Handle
Pull up handle
Bind screw
Figure 6.7.1 Handle of Relay Unit
6.7.4
Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to the service.
• Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
• Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5
Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C is
recommended for long-term storage.
⎯ 162 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
7. Putting Relay into Service
The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
• Check that all the external connections are correct.
• Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock
are correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are
recorded during the tests.
• Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Alarm view"
screen.
• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
⎯ 163 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 164 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix A
and Implementation of Thermal Model
to IEC60255-8
⎯ 165 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC1 and EF1, each have a programmable reset
feature. Resetting may be instantaneous, definite time delayed, or, in the case of IEEE/US curves,
inverse time delayed.
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme. On the other hand, the inverse reset
characteristic is particularly useful to provide correct co-ordination with an upstream induction disc type
overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is
in plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily
extinguishes the fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.
An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until the
fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with associated
damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60 seconds is
applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each successive
fault occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the point reached
during the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes permanent. Figure
A-1 illustrates this theory.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay
with Instantaneous
Reset
/3
Inverse Time Relay
with Definite Time
Reset
Delayed Reset
Figure A-1
⎯ 166 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8
Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
θ =
−t ⎞
I2 ⎛
⎜1 − e τ ⎟ × 100%
2
⎠
I AOL ⎝
(1)
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateθis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where
0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at which no further
temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for
any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ =
100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then θ will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time
constant τ, as in Figure A-2. If θ = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
θ (%)
100%
I2
2
I AOL
× 100%
2
θ = I I 2 ⎛⎜⎝1 − e
AOL
− tτ ⎞
⎟
⎠
× 100 %
t (s)
Figure A-2
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.
⎡
⎤
I2
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2 ⎥
⎣ I − I AOL ⎦
(1)
····· Cold curve
⎡ I2 − I 2 ⎤
t =τ·Ln ⎢ 2 2P ⎥
⎢⎣ I − I AOL ⎥⎦
(2)
····· Hot curve
where:
⎯ 167 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IP = prior load current.
In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering
for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and
is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient
temperature.
θ (%)
Overload Current
Condition
Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition
Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure A-3
⎯ 168 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix B
Signal List
⎯ 169 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
PLC input
No.
SIGNAL NAME
0
CONSTANT_0
1
CONSTANT_1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51 OC1-A
52 OC1-B
53 OC1-C
54 OC2-A
55 OC2-B
56 OC2-C
57 OC3-A
58 OC3-B
59 OC3-C
60 OC4-A
61 OC4-B
62 OC4-C
63 EF1
64 EF2
65 EF3
66 EF4
67 SEF1
68 SEF2
69 SEF3
70 SEF4
Contents
constant 0
constant 1
OC1-A relay element output
OC1-B relay element output
OC1-C relay element output
EF1 relay element output
SEF1 relay element output
⎯ 170 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
SIGNAL NAME
UC1-A
UC1-B
UC1-C
UC2-A
UC2-B
UC2-C
THM-A
THM-T
NOC1
NOC2
BCD
CBF-A
CBF-B
CBF-C
ICLDO-A
ICLDO-B
ICLDO-C
OC1-A_HS
OC1-B_HS
OC1-C_HS
EF1_HS
SEF1_HS
OC1-A_INST
OC1-B_INST
OC1-C_INST
EF1_INST
SEF1_INST
OC1_INST-OR
OC2_INST-OR
CBF-EF
OC1_TRIP
OC1-A_TRIP
OC1-B_TRIP
OC1-C_TRIP
OC2_TRIP
OC2-A_TRIP
OC2-B_TRIP
OC2-C_TRIP
OC3_TRIP
OC3-A_TRIP
OC3-B_TRIP
OC3-C_TRIP
OC4_ALARM
OC4-A_ALARM
OC4-B_ALARM
OC4-C_ALARM
EF1_TRIP
EF2_TRIP
EF3_TRIP
EF4_ALARM
SEF1-S1_TRIP
SEF1-S2_TRIP
SEF2_TRIP
SEF3_TRIP
SEF4_ALARM
UC1_TRIP
UC1-A_TRIP
UC1-B_TRIP
UC1-C_TRIP
UC2_ALARM
UC2-A_ALARM
UC2-B_ALARM
UC2-C_ALARM
THM_ALARM
THM_TRIP
NOC1_TRIP
NOC2_ALARM
BCD_TRIP
CBF_RETRIP
CBF_TRIP
Contents
UC1-A relay element output
UC1-B relay element output
UC1-C relay element output
UC2-A relay element output
UC2-B relay element output
UC2-C relay element output
THERMAL Alarm rel ay element output
THERMAL Trip relay element output
NOC1 relay element output
NOC2 relay element output
BCD relay el ement output
CBF-A relay element output
CBF-B relay element output
CBF-C relay element output
ICLDO-A relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
ICLDO-B relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
ICLDO-C relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
High speed output of OC1-A relay
High speed output of OC1-B relay
High speed output of OC1-C rel ay
High speed output of EF1 relay
High speed output of SEF1 relay
OC1-A relay element start
OC1-B relay element start
OC1-C relay element start
EF1 relay element start
SEF1 rel ay element start
OC1_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
OC2_INST relay (3PHASE OR)
CBF-EF relay element output
OC1 trip command
OC1 trip command (A Phase)
OC1 trip command (B Phase)
OC1 trip command (C Phase)
OC2 trip command
OC3 trip command
OC4 alarm command
OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
OC4 alarm command (C Phase)
EF1 trip command
EF2 trip command
EF3 trip command
EF4 alarm command
SEF1 Stage1 trip command
SEF1 Stage2 trip command
SEF2 trip command
SEF3 trip command
SEF4 alarm command
UC1 trip command
UC1 trip command (A Phase)
UC1 trip command (B Phase)
UC1 trip command (C Phase)
UC2 alarm command
UC2 alarm command (A Phase)
UC2 alarm command (B Phase)
UC2 alarm command (C Phase)
Thermal alarm command
Thermal trip command
NOC1 tri p command
NOC2 alarm command
BCD trip command
CBF retrip command
CBF retrip command
⎯ 171 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
N o.
SIGN AL N AM E
C ontents
141
142
143
144
145
146
C LP_STAT E0
C old Load Protection State
147
C LP_STAT E1
148
C LP_STAT E2
149
C LP_STAT E3
153
OC 2-A_IN ST
OC 2-A relay element start
154
OC 2-B_IN ST
OC 2-B relay element start
155
OC 2-C _IN ST
OC 2-C relay element start
156
EF 2_IN ST
EF2 relay element start
157
SEF2_IN ST
SEF2 relay element start
N OC 1_IN ST
N OC 1 relay element start
179
OC -A_D IST
OC -A relay for disturbance record
180
OC -B_D IST
OC -B relay for disturbance record
181
OC -C _D IST
OC -C relay for disturbance record
182
EF _D IST
EF relay for disturbance record
183
SEF_D IST
SEF relay for disturbance record
184
N OC _D IST
N OC relay for disturbance record
185
N OC 2_IN ST
N OC 2 relay element start
150
151
152
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
⎯ 172 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
211
SIGNAL NAM E
Contents
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
ARC_BLK_OR
Auto-Reclosing block
221
ARC_READY_T
Auto-Reclosing ready condition
222
ARC_IN-PROG
Auto-Reclosing in-prog ress conditon
223
ARC_SHOT
Auto-Reclosing shot
224
ARC_SHOT1
Auto-Reclosing shot of number1
225
ARC_SHOT2
226
ARC_SHOT3
227
ARC_SHOT4
228
ARC_SHOT5
229
ARC_FT
Auto-Reclosing failed (Final trip)
230
ARC_SUCCESS
Auto-Reclosing succeed
232
ARC_COORD
Auto-Reclosing coordination
233
OC_COORD-A
OC-A coordination element
234
OC_COORD-B
OC-B coordination element
235
OC_COORD-C
OC-C coordination element
236
EF_COORD
EF coordination element
237
SEF_COORD
SEF coordination element
IC D-A
Inrush current detector
231
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
IC D-B
IC D-C
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
⎯ 173 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
281
282
283
284
285
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
EF1_CARRIER
EF1 carrier command
EF2_CARRIER
EF3_CARRIER
EF4_CARRIER
EF2 carrier command
EF3 carrier command
EF4 carrier command
314
315
316
317
CBF_RETRIP-A
CBF_RETRIP-B
CBF_RETRIP-C
CBF retrip command(A Phase)
CBF retrip command(B Phase)
CBF retrip command(C Phase)
318
319
320
321
CBF_TRIP-A
CBF_TRIP-B
CBF_TRIP-C
CBF back trip command(A Phase)
CBF back trip command(B Phase)
CBF back trip command(C Phase)
CBF_OP-A
CBF_OP-B
CBF_OP-C
CBF start sig nal (A phase)
CBF start sig nal (B phase)
CBF start sig nal (C phase)
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
⎯ 174 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
351
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
GEN.TRIP
General trip command
372
GEN.TRIP-A
General trip command (A Phase)
373
GEN.TRIP-B
General trip command (B Phase)
374
375
GEN.TRIP-C
GEN.TRIP-N
General trip command (C Phase)
General trip command (N Phase)
380
381
GEN.ALARM
GEN.ALARM-A
General alarm command
General alarm command (A Phase)
382
GEN.ALARM-B
General alarm command (B Phase)
383
GEN.ALARM-C
General alarm command (C Phase)
384
GEN.ALARM-N
General alarm command (N Phase)
389
CB_CLOSE
CB closed status
390
CB_OPEN
CB opened status
376
377
378
379
385
386
387
388
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
⎯ 175 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
421
422
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
OC1-OR
OC2-OR
OC1 relay (3PHASE OR)
449
450
OC3-OR
OC4-OR
453
454
UC1-OR
UC2-OR
UC1 relay (3PHASE OR)
UC2 relay (3PHASE OR)
455
456
CBF-OR
CBF relay (3PHASE OR)
ICD-OR
ICD (3PHASE OR)
471
472
BO1_OP
BO2_OP
Binary output 1
Binary output 2
473
474
BO3_OP
BO4_OP
Binary output 3
Binary output 4
475
476
BO5_OP
BO6_OP
Binary output 5
Binary output 6
477
478
BO7_OP
Binary output 7
451
452
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
⎯ 176 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
491
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
OC1-A_RST
OC1-B_RST
OC1 relay element definite time reset
ditto
540
541
542
OC1-C_RST
OC2-A_RST
OC2-B_RST
ditto
OC2 relay element definite time reset
ditto
543
544
545
OC2-C_RST
EF1_RST
EF2_RST
ditto
EF1 relay element definite time reset
EF2 relay element definite time reset
546
547
SEF1_RST
SEF2_RST
SEF1 relay element definite time reset
SEF2 relay element definite time reset
548
549
550
NOC1_RST
NOC2_RST
NOC1 relay element definite time reset
NOC2 relay element definite time reset
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
⎯ 177 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
561
562
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
CBALM-A
CBALM-B
CB ALARM-A relay element output
CB ALARM-B relay element output
573
574
CBALM-C
CB ALARM-C relay element output
575
576
OC1-A_DEPRST
OC1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
577
578
OC1-B_DEPRST
OC1-C_DEPRST
ditto
ditto
579
580
EF1_DEPRST
SEF1_DEPRST
EF1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
SEF1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
581
582
NOC1_DEPRST
OC2-A_DEPRST
NOC1 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
OC2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
583
584
OC2-B_DEPRST
OC2-C_DEPRST
ditto
ditto
585
586
EF2_DEPRST
SEF2_DEPRST
EF2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
SEF2 relay element IDMT definite time reset
587
588
NOC2_DEPRST
NOC2 relay element IDMT dependent time reset
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
:
:
760
⎯ 178 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
BI1_COMMAND
BI2_COMMAND
BI3_COMMAND
BI4_COMMAND
BI5_COMMAND
BI6_COMMAND
BI7_COMMAND
BI8_COMMAND
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
BI8
E_FAULT_L1
E_FAULT_L2
E_FAULT_L3
A phase earth fault signal for IEC103
B phase earth fault signal for IEC103
C phase earth fault signal for IEC103
PICKUP_L1
PICKUP_L2
PICKUP_L3
A phase element pick-up for IEC103
B phase element pick-up for IEC103
C phase element pick-up for IEC103
PICKUP_N
Earth fault element pick-up for IEC103
CBF_TP_RETP
IDMT_OC_TRIP
DT_OC_TRIP
IDMT_EF_TRIP
DT_EF_TRIP
CBF trip or CBF retrip for IEC103
Inverse time OC trip for IEC103
Definite time OC trip for IEC103
Inverse time earth fault OC trip for IEC103
Definite time earth fault OC trip for IEC103
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
:
:
1030
⎯ 179 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
1031
1032
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
FAULT_PHA_A
FAULT_PHA_B
FAULT_PHA_C
fault_phase_A
fault_phase_B
fault_phase_C
FAULT_PHA_N
fault_phase_N
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
:
:
1240
⎯ 180 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
1241
1242
SIGNAL NAME
IEC_MDBLK
IEC_TESTMODE
Contents
monitor direction blocked
IEC61870-5-103 testmode
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
GROUP1_ACTIVE
GROUP2_ACTIVE
GROUP3_ACTIVE
GROUP4_ACTIVE
GROUP5_ACTIVE
g roup1 active
g roup2 active
g roup3 active
g roup4 active
g roup5 active
1248
1249
1250
1251
GROUP6_ACTIVE
GROUP7_ACTIVE
GROUP8_ACTIVE
RLY_FAIL
g roup6 active
g roup7 active
g roup8 active
RELAY FAILURE
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
RLY_OP_BLK
AMF_OFF
RELAY OUTPUT BLOCK
SV BLOCK
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
RY_FAIL-A
TRIP-H
Trip signal hold
CT_ERR_UF
CT error(unfiltered)
CT_ERR
CT error
TCSV
CBSV
Trip circuit supervision failure
Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
TC_ALARM
SGM_Iy_ALM
OT_ALARM
Trip counter alarm
ΣIY alarm
Operate time alarm
1279
GEN_PICKUP
General start/pick-up
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
BI1_COM_UF
Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
BI2_COM_UF
BI3_COM_UF
BI4_COM_UF
BI5_COM_UF
BI6_COM_UF
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
Binary input signal
1290
1291
1292
1293
BI7_COM_UF
BI8_COM_UF
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
BI2 (unfiltered)
BI3 (unfiltered)
BI4 (unfiltered)
BI5 (unfiltered)
BI6 (unfiltered)
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
⎯ 181 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
1311
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
GOOSE_IN_Q1
Goose Input Quality #1
1329
1330
1331
GOOSE_IN_Q2
GOOSE_IN_Q3
GOOSE_IN_Q4
1332
1333
1334
GOOSE_IN_Q5
GOOSE_IN_Q6
GOOSE_IN_Q7
1335
1336
GOOSE_IN_Q8
GOOSE_IN_Q9
1337
1338
1339
GOOSE_IN_Q10
GOOSE_IN_Q11
GOOSE_IN_Q12
1340
1341
1342
GOOSE_IN_Q13
GOOSE_IN_Q14
GOOSE_IN_Q15
1343
1344
1345
GOOSE_IN_Q16
GOOSE_IN_Q17
GOOSE_IN_Q18
1346
1347
1348
GOOSE_IN_Q19
GOOSE_IN_Q20
GOOSE_IN_Q21
1349
1350
1351
GOOSE_IN_Q22
GOOSE_IN_Q23
GOOSE_IN_Q24
1352
1353
GOOSE_IN_Q25
GOOSE_IN_Q26
1354
1355
1356
GOOSE_IN_Q27
GOOSE_IN_Q28
GOOSE_IN_Q29
1357
1358
1359
GOOSE_IN_Q30
GOOSE_IN_Q31
GOOSE_IN_Q32
1360
1361
1362
GOOSE_IN_1
GOOSE_IN_2
GOOSE_IN_3
Goose Input #1
Goose Input #2
Goose Input #3
1363
1364
1365
GOOSE_IN_4
GOOSE_IN_5
GOOSE_IN_6
Goose Input #4
Goose Input #5
Goose Input #6
1366
1367
1368
GOOSE_IN_7
GOOSE_IN_8
GOOSE_IN_9
Goose Input #7
Goose Input #8
Goose Input #9
1369
1370
GOOSE_IN_10
GOOSE_IN_11
Goose Input #10
Goose Input #11
1371
1372
1373
GOOSE_IN_12
GOOSE_IN_13
GOOSE_IN_14
Goose Input #12
Goose Input #13
Goose Input #14
1374
1375
1376
GOOSE_IN_15
GOOSE_IN_16
GOOSE_IN_17
Goose Input #15
Goose Input #16
Goose Input #17
1377
1378
1379
GOOSE_IN_18
GOOSE_IN_19
GOOSE_IN_20
Goose Input #18
Goose Input #19
Goose Input #20
1380
GOOSE_IN_21
Goose Input #21
⎯ 182 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
1381
SIGNAL NAME
GOOSE_IN_22
Contents
Goose Input #22
1382
1383
GOOSE_IN_23
GOOSE_IN_24
Goose Input #23
Goose Input #24
1384
GOOSE_IN_25
Goose Input #25
1385
GOOSE_IN_26
Goose Input #26
1386
GOOSE_IN_27
Goose Input #27
1387
GOOSE_IN_28
Goose Input #28
1388
1389
GOOSE_IN_29
GOOSE_IN_30
Goose Input #29
Goose Input #30
1390
GOOSE_IN_31
Goose Input #31
1391
GOOSE_IN_32
Goose Input #32
1401
LOCAL_OP_ACT
local operation active
1402
REMOTE_OP_ACT
remote operation active
1403
NORM_LED_ON
IN-SERVICE LED ON
1404
1405
ALM_LED_ON
TRIP_LED_ON
ALARM LED ON
TRIP LED ON
1406
TEST_LED_ON
TEST LED ON
1408
PRG_LED_RESET
Latched programmable LED RESET
1409
LED_RESET
TRIP LED RESET
1410
1411
ARC_COM_ON
IEC103 communication command
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1407
1412
1413
PROT_COM_ON
IEC103 communication command
1414
PRG_LED1_ON
PROGRAMMABLE LED1 ON
1415
1416
PRG_LED2_ON
PRG_LED3_ON
1417
PRG_LED4_ON
1418
PRG_LED5_ON
1419
PRG_LED6_ON
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
LCD_IND.
VirLCD indication(Virtual LED) command
1431
LCD_IND1.
LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command
1432
1433
LCD_IND2.
LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command
1434
1435
F.Record_CLR
Fault record clear
1436
E.Record_CLR
Event record clear
1437
1438
D.Record_CLR
Data_Lost
Disturbance record clear
Data clear by BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1439
TP_COUNT_CLR
Trip counter cleared
1440
Iy_COUNT_CLR
SGM_Iy counter cleared
1441
AR_COUNT_CLR
ARC Counter CLR
1442
1443
DEMAND_CLR
Demand cleared
1444
1445
PLC_data_CHG
PLC data change
1446
IEC103_data_CHG
IEC-103 data change
1447
IEC850_data_CHG
IEC-850 data change
1448
1449
Sys.set_change
Rly.set_change
System setting change
Relay setting change
1450
Grp.set_change
Group setting change
⎯ 183 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
1451
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
KEY-VIEW
KEY-RESET
VIEW key status (1:pressed)
RESET key status (2:pressed)
1458
1459
KEY-ENTER
KEY-END
ENTER key status (3:pressed)
END key status (4:pressed)
1460
1461
1462
KEY-CANCEL
CANCEL key status (5:pressed)
1463
1464
1465
DC_supply_err
DC supply error
1466
1467
1468
RTC_err
RTC stopped
GOOSE_stop
GOOSE stopped
1469
1470
1471
Ping_err
PLC_err
61850_err
Ping no anwer
PLC stopeed
61850 stopped
1472
1473
1474
SUM_err
ROM_RAM_err
SRAM_err
Program ROM checksum error
Rom - Ram mismatch error
SRAM memory monitoring error
1475
1476
1477
BU_RAM_err
BU-RAM memory monitoring error
EEPROM_err
EEPROM memory monitoring error
1478
1479
1480
A/D_err
CPU_err
A/D accuracy checking error
Program error
1481
1482
1483
Invalid
NMI
Sampling_err
Invalid error
NMI
Sampling error
1484
1485
DIO_err
LAN_err
DIO card connection error
LAN error
1486
1487
1488
LCD_err
ROM_data_err
LCD panel connection error
8M Romdata error
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
:
:
1535
⎯ 184 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
PLC output
No.
SIGNAL NAME
1536 OC1_BLOCK
1537 OC2_BLOCK
1538 OC3_BLOCK
1539 OC4_BLOCK
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544 EF1_BLOCK
1545 EF2_BLOCK
1546 EF3_BLOCK
1547 EF4_BLOCK
1548 EF1_PERMIT
1549 EF2_PERMIT
1550 EF3_PERMIT
1551 EF4 PERMIT
1552 SEF1_BLOCK
1553 SEF2_BLOCK
1554 SEF3_BLOCK
1555 SEF4_BLOCK
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560 NOC1_BLOCK
1561 NOC2_BLOCK
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568 UC1_BLOCK
1569 UC2_BLOCK
1570 CBF_BLOCK
1571
1572 THM_BLOCK
1573 THMA BLOCK
1574 BCD_BLOCK
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604 ARC_BLOCK
1605 ARC_READY
Contents
OC trip block command
ditto
ditto
ditto
EF trip block command
ditto
ditto
ditto
Carrier protection permissive command
ditto
ditto
ditto
SEF trip block command
ditto
ditto
ditto
NOC trip block command
ditto
UC trip block command
ditto
CBF trip block command
THM trip block command
ditto
BCD trip block command
ARC scheme block command
ARC ready command
⎯ 185 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
N o.
1606
SIGN AL N AM E
AR C _IN IT
C ontents
AR C initiation command
1607
1608
M AN U AL_C LOSE
AR C _N O_AC T
M anual close command
AR C not applied command
1626
1627
1628
EXT _T R IP- A
External tr ip commamd ( A Phase)
1629
1630
EXT _T R IP- B
EXT _T R IP- C
External tr ip commamd ( B Phase)
External tr ip commamd ( C Phase)
1631
1632
1633
EXT _T R IP
T C _F AIL
C B_N /O_C ON T
External tr ip commamd
T rip cir cuit F ail Alar m commamd
C B N /O contact commamd
1634
1635
C B_N /C _C ON T
C B N /C contact commamd
IN D .R ESET
Indication reset command
1648
AR C -S1_C ON D
Auto-r eclosing shot1 condition
1649
AR C -S2_C ON D
2
1650
AR C -S3_C ON D
3
1651
AR C -S4_C ON D
4
1652
AR C -S5_C ON D
5
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
C BF _IN IT -A
1661
C BF _IN IT -B
C BF initiation command (Phase A)
B
1662
C BF _IN IT -C
C
1663
C BF _IN IT
C BF initiation command
1664
T P_C OU N T -A
T rip counter count up command
1665
T P_C OU N T -B
ditto
1666
T P_C OU N T -C
ditto
1667
T P_C OU N T
ditto
1672
SGM _IY-A
Sig ma IY counter count up command
1673
SGM _IY-B
ditto
1674
SGM _IY-C
ditto
1668
1669
1670
1671
1675
⎯ 186 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
N o.
1676
SIGN AL N AM E
OT _ALAR M - A
C ontents
Oper ating alar m start commnad
1677
OT _ALAR M - B
ditto
1678
OT _ALAR M - C
ditto
1696
OC 1_IN ST _T P
OC 1 instantly trip command
1697
OC 2_IN ST _T P
1698
OC 3_IN ST _T P
1699
OC 4_IN ST _T P
1700
EF 1_IN ST _T P
EF 1 instantly trip command
1701
EF 2_IN ST _T P
1702
EF 3_IN ST _T P
1703
EF 4_IN ST _T P
1704
SEF 1_IN ST _T P
SEF 1 instantly tr ip command
1705
SEF 2_IN ST _T P
1706
SEF 3_IN ST _T P
1707
SEF 4_IN ST _T P
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
:
:
2550
⎯ 187 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
2551
2552
2553
2554
SIGNAL NAM E
Contents
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
DISP.ALARM 1
DISP.ALARM 2
DISP.ALARM 3
DISP.ALARM 4
Indicate the alarm display
ditto
ditto
ditto
SYNC_CLOCK
Synchronise clock commamd
ALARM _LED_SET
Alarm LED set
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
⎯ 188 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
F.RECORD 1
F.RECORD 2
F.RECORD 3
F.RECORD 4
Fault record stored comman d 1
2
3
4
D.RECORD1
D.RECORD2
D.RECORD3
D.RECORD4
Disturban ce record store d command 1
2
3
4
SET.GROU P1
SET.GROU P2
SET.GROU P3
SET.GROU P4
SET.GROU P5
SET.GROU P6
SET.GROU P7
SET.GROU P8
Active se tting group changed command (Change to group1 )
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CON_TPMD1
CON_TPMD2
CON_TPMD3
CON_TPMD4
CON_TPMD5
CON_TPMD6
CON_TPMD7
CON_TPMD8
User configu rable tri p mode in fault record
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ARC_COM_RECV Auto-reclose r ina ctivate command received
PROT_COM_RECV protection inactivate command rece ived
TPLED_RST_RCV TRIP LED RESET command received
⎯ 189 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
SIGNAL NAME
Contents
⎯ 190 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
2761
SIGNAL NAM E
Contents
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
TEM P001
TEM P002
2818
2819
TEM P003
TEM P004
2820
2821
2822
TEM P005
TEM P006
TEM P007
2823
2824
TEM P008
TEM P009
2825
2826
2827
TEM P010
TEM P011
TEM P012
2828
2829
TEM P013
TEM P014
2830
TEM P015
⎯ 191 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
2831
2832
2833
2834
SIGNAL NAM E
TEM P016
TEM P017
TEM P018
TEM P019
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
TEM P020
TEM P021
TEM P022
TEM P023
TEM P024
TEM P025
TEM P026
TEM P027
TEM P028
TEM P029
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
TEM P030
TEM P031
TEM P032
TEM P033
TEM P034
TEM P035
TEM P036
TEM P037
TEM P038
TEM P039
TEM P040
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
TEM P041
TEM P042
TEM P043
TEM P044
TEM P045
TEM P046
TEM P047
TEM P048
TEM P049
TEM P050
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
TEM P051
TEM P052
TEM P053
TEM P054
TEM P055
TEM P056
TEM P057
TEM P058
TEM P059
TEM P060
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
TEM P061
TEM P062
TEM P063
TEM P064
TEM P065
TEM P066
TEM P067
TEM P068
TEM P069
TEM P070
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
TEM P071
TEM P072
TEM P073
TEM P074
TEM P075
TEM P076
TEM P077
TEM P078
TEM P079
TEM P080
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
TEM P081
TEM P082
TEM P083
TEM P084
TEM P085
Contents
⎯ 192 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
2901
2902
2903
2904
SIGNAL NAM E
TEM P086
TEM P087
TEM P088
TEM P089
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
TEM P090
TEM P091
TEM P092
TEM P093
TEM P094
TEM P095
TEM P096
TEM P097
TEM P098
TEM P099
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
TEM P100
TEM P101
TEM P102
TEM P103
TEM P104
TEM P105
TEM P106
TEM P107
TEM P108
TEM P109
TEM P110
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
TEM P111
TEM P112
TEM P113
TEM P114
TEM P115
TEM P116
TEM P117
TEM P118
TEM P119
TEM P120
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
TEM P121
TEM P122
TEM P123
TEM P124
TEM P125
TEM P126
TEM P127
TEM P128
TEM P129
TEM P130
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
TEM P131
TEM P132
TEM P133
TEM P134
TEM P135
TEM P136
TEM P137
TEM P138
TEM P139
TEM P140
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
TEM P141
TEM P142
TEM P143
TEM P144
TEM P145
TEM P146
TEM P147
TEM P148
TEM P149
TEM P150
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
TEM P151
TEM P152
TEM P153
TEM P154
TEM P155
Contents
⎯ 193 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
2971
2972
2973
2974
SIGNAL NAM E
TEM P156
TEM P157
TEM P158
TEM P159
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
TEM P160
TEM P161
TEM P162
TEM P163
TEM P164
TEM P165
TEM P166
TEM P167
TEM P168
TEM P169
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
TEM P170
TEM P171
TEM P172
TEM P173
TEM P174
TEM P175
TEM P176
TEM P177
TEM P178
TEM P179
TEM P180
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
TEM P181
TEM P182
TEM P183
TEM P184
TEM P185
TEM P186
TEM P187
TEM P188
TEM P189
TEM P190
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
TEM P191
TEM P192
TEM P193
TEM P194
TEM P195
TEM P196
TEM P197
TEM P198
TEM P199
TEM P200
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
TEM P201
TEM P202
TEM P203
TEM P204
TEM P205
TEM P206
TEM P207
TEM P208
TEM P209
TEM P210
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
TEM P211
TEM P212
TEM P213
TEM P214
TEM P215
TEM P216
TEM P217
TEM P218
TEM P219
TEM P220
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
TEM P221
TEM P222
TEM P223
TEM P224
TEM P225
Contents
⎯ 194 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
No.
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
SIGNAL NAME
TEMP2 26
TEMP2 27
TEMP2 28
TEMP2 29
TEMP2 30
TEMP2 31
TEMP2 32
TEMP2 33
TEMP2 34
TEMP2 35
TEMP2 36
TEMP2 37
TEMP2 38
TEMP2 39
TEMP2 40
TEMP2 41
TEMP2 42
TEMP2 43
TEMP2 44
TEMP2 45
TEMP2 46
TEMP2 47
TEMP2 48
TEMP2 49
TEMP2 50
TEMP2 51
TEMP2 52
TEMP2 53
TEMP2 54
TEMP2 55
TEMP2 56
Contents
⎯ 195 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
For IEC61850
Measure Table
NO
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIGNAL NAME
Ia_mag
Ib_mag
Ic_mag
Ia_ang
Ib_ang
Ic_ang
Ie_mag
Ie_ang
Ise_mag
Ise_ang
I1_mag
I2_mag
I0_mag
I1_ang
I2_ang
I0_ang
CONTENTS
Ia magnitude
Ib magnitude
Ic magnitude
Ia angle
Ib angle
Ic angle
Ie magnitude
Ie angle
Ise magnitude
Ise angle
I1 magnitude
I2 magnitude
I0 magnitude
I1 angle
I2 angle
I0 angle
⎯ 196 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Setting Table
NO
NO
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME
0 GROUP_NO
CONTENTS
number of groups
1 ACT_GROUP
active group number
62
2 EDIT_GROUP
edit group number
63
3 CHG_GROUP
change active group
64
4
65
5
66
6
67
7
68
8
69
9
70
10
71
11
72
12
73
13
74
14
75
15
76
16
77
17
78
18
79
19
80
20
81
21
CONTENTS
61
82
22
83
23
84
24
85
25
86
26
87
27
88
28
89
29
30
31
32
33
34
90 1A2_5A1
1A:2 5A:1
91 1A1_5A2
1A:1 5A:2
92 1A1_5A0
1A:1 5A:0
93 1A0_5A1
1A:0 5A:1
94 1A3_5A2
1A:3 5A:2
95
35
96
36
97
37
98
38
99
39
40
41
42
100 SoftType
Software type
101 MappingName
Mapping info
102 Vendor
venfor name
103
43
104
44
105
45
46
106
47
107
48
108
49
109
50
110 Const0
Always 0
51
111 Const1
Always 1
52
112 Const2
Always 2
53
113 Const3
Always 3
54
114
55
115
56
116
57
117
58
118
59
119
60
⎯ 197 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Status Table
NO
SIGNAL NAME
0 GOOSE_V_001
1 GOOSE_V_002
CONTENTS
GOOSE_Value_001
GOOSE_Value_002
2 GOOSE_V_003
3 GOOSE_V_004
4 GOOSE_V_005
NO
SIGNAL NAME
51 GOOSE_V_052
52 GOOSE_V_053
CONTENTS
GOOSE_Value_052
GOOSE_Value_053
GOOSE_Value_003
GOOSE_Value_004
GOOSE_Value_005
53 GOOSE_V_054
54 GOOSE_V_055
55 GOOSE_V_056
GOOSE_Value_054
GOOSE_Value_055
GOOSE_Value_056
5 GOOSE_V_006
6 GOOSE_V_007
GOOSE_Value_006
GOOSE_Value_007
56 GOOSE_V_057
57 GOOSE_V_058
GOOSE_Value_057
GOOSE_Value_058
7 GOOSE_V_008
8 GOOSE_V_009
9 GOOSE_V_010
GOOSE_Value_008
GOOSE_Value_009
GOOSE_Value_010
58 GOOSE_V_059
59 GOOSE_V_060
60 GOOSE_V_061
GOOSE_Value_059
GOOSE_Value_060
GOOSE_Value_061
10 GOOSE_V_011
11 GOOSE_V_012
12 GOOSE_V_013
GOOSE_Value_011
GOOSE_Value_012
GOOSE_Value_013
61 GOOSE_V_062
62 GOOSE_V_063
63 GOOSE_V_064
GOOSE_Value_062
GOOSE_Value_063
GOOSE_Value_064
13 GOOSE_V_014
14 GOOSE_V_015
15 GOOSE_V_016
GOOSE_Value_014
GOOSE_Value_015
GOOSE_Value_016
64 GOOSE_V_065
65 GOOSE_V_066
66 GOOSE_V_067
GOOSE_Value_065
GOOSE_Value_066
GOOSE_Value_067
16 GOOSE_V_017
17 GOOSE_V_018
18 GOOSE_V_019
GOOSE_Value_017
GOOSE_Value_018
GOOSE_Value_019
67 GOOSE_V_068
68 GOOSE_V_069
69 GOOSE_V_070
GOOSE_Value_068
GOOSE_Value_069
GOOSE_Value_070
19 GOOSE_V_020
20 GOOSE_V_021
21 GOOSE_V_022
GOOSE_Value_020
GOOSE_Value_021
GOOSE_Value_022
70 GOOSE_V_071
71 GOOSE_V_072
72 GOOSE_V_073
GOOSE_Value_071
GOOSE_Value_072
GOOSE_Value_073
22 GOOSE_V_023
23 GOOSE_V_024
24 GOOSE_V_025
GOOSE_Value_023
GOOSE_Value_024
GOOSE_Value_025
73 GOOSE_V_074
74 GOOSE_V_075
75 GOOSE_V_076
GOOSE_Value_074
GOOSE_Value_075
GOOSE_Value_076
25 GOOSE_V_026
26 GOOSE_V_027
27 GOOSE_V_028
GOOSE_Value_026
GOOSE_Value_027
GOOSE_Value_028
76 GOOSE_V_077
77 GOOSE_V_078
78 GOOSE_V_079
GOOSE_Value_077
GOOSE_Value_078
GOOSE_Value_079
28 GOOSE_V_029
29 GOOSE_V_030
GOOSE_Value_029
GOOSE_Value_030
79 GOOSE_V_080
80 GOOSE_V_081
GOOSE_Value_080
GOOSE_Value_081
30 GOOSE_V_031
31 GOOSE_V_032
32 GOOSE_V_033
GOOSE_Value_031
GOOSE_Value_032
GOOSE_Value_033
81 GOOSE_V_082
82 GOOSE_V_083
83 GOOSE_V_084
GOOSE_Value_082
GOOSE_Value_083
GOOSE_Value_084
33 GOOSE_V_034
34 GOOSE_V_035
35 GOOSE_V_036
GOOSE_Value_034
GOOSE_Value_035
GOOSE_Value_036
84 GOOSE_V_085
85 GOOSE_V_086
86 GOOSE_V_087
GOOSE_Value_085
GOOSE_Value_086
GOOSE_Value_087
36 GOOSE_V_037
37 GOOSE_V_038
38 GOOSE_V_039
GOOSE_Value_037
GOOSE_Value_038
GOOSE_Value_039
87 GOOSE_V_088
88 GOOSE_V_089
89 GOOSE_V_090
GOOSE_Value_088
GOOSE_Value_089
GOOSE_Value_090
39 GOOSE_V_040
40 GOOSE_V_041
41 GOOSE_V_042
GOOSE_Value_040
GOOSE_Value_041
GOOSE_Value_042
90 GOOSE_V_091
91 GOOSE_V_092
92 GOOSE_V_093
GOOSE_Value_091
GOOSE_Value_092
GOOSE_Value_093
42 GOOSE_V_043
43 GOOSE_V_044
44 GOOSE_V_045
GOOSE_Value_043
GOOSE_Value_044
GOOSE_Value_045
93 GOOSE_V_094
94 GOOSE_V_095
95 GOOSE_V_096
GOOSE_Value_094
GOOSE_Value_095
GOOSE_Value_096
45 GOOSE_V_046
46 GOOSE_V_047
47 GOOSE_V_048
GOOSE_Value_046
GOOSE_Value_047
GOOSE_Value_048
96 GOOSE_V_097
97 GOOSE_V_098
98 GOOSE_V_099
GOOSE_Value_097
GOOSE_Value_098
GOOSE_Value_099
48 GOOSE_V_049
49 GOOSE_V_050
50 GOOSE_V_051
GOOSE_Value_049
GOOSE_Value_050
GOOSE_Value_051
99 GOOSE_V_100
100 GOOSE_V_101
101 GOOSE_V_102
GOOSE_Value_100
GOOSE_Value_101
GOOSE_Value_102
⎯ 198 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
NO
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
SIGNAL NAME
GOOSE_V_102
GOOSE_V_103
GOOSE_V_104
GOOSE_V_105
GOOSE_V_106
GOOSE_V_107
GOOSE_V_108
GOOSE_V_109
GOOSE_V_110
GOOSE_V_111
GOOSE_V_112
GOOSE_V_113
GOOSE_V_114
GOOSE_V_115
GOOSE_V_116
GOOSE_V_117
GOOSE_V_118
GOOSE_V_119
GOOSE_V_120
GOOSE_V_121
GOOSE_V_122
GOOSE_V_123
GOOSE_V_124
GOOSE_V_125
GOOSE_V_126
GOOSE_V_127
GOOSE_V_128
XCBR_POS0
CONTENTS
GOOSE_Value_102
GOOSE_Value_103
GOOSE_Value_104
GOOSE_Value_105
GOOSE_Value_106
GOOSE_Value_107
GOOSE_Value_108
GOOSE_Value_109
GOOSE_Value_110
GOOSE_Value_111
GOOSE_Value_112
GOOSE_Value_113
GOOSE_Value_114
GOOSE_Value_115
GOOSE_Value_116
GOOSE_Value_117
GOOSE_Value_118
GOOSE_Value_119
GOOSE_Value_120
GOOSE_Value_121
GOOSE_Value_122
GOOSE_Value_123
GOOSE_Value_124
GOOSE_Value_125
GOOSE_Value_126
GOOSE_Value_127
GOOSE_Value_128
XCBR_POS0
NO
SIGNAL NAME
CONTENTS
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
DIRMODE_OC1
DIRMODE_OC2
DIRMODE_OC3
DIRMODE_OC4
DIRMODE_EF1
DIRMODE_EF2
DIRMODE_EF3
DIRMODE_OC1
DIRMODE_OC2
DIRMODE_OC3
DIRMODE_OC4
DIRMODE_EF1
DIRMODE_EF2
DIRMODE_EF3
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
DIRMODE_EF4
DIRMODE_SEF1
DIRMODE_SEF2
DIRMODE_SEF3
DIRMODE_SEF4
DIRMODE_NOC1
DIRMODE_NOC2
DIRMODE_EF4
DIRMODE_SEF1
DIRMODE_SEF2
DIRMODE_SEF3
DIRMODE_SEF4
DIRMODE_NOC1
DIRMODE_NOC2
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
LEDRST_EXEC LEDRST_EXEC
RREC1
RREC1
XCBR_OPCNT0 XCBR_OPCNT0
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
HEALTH
198
199
200 MOD_001
HEALTH
⎯ 199 ⎯
IEC-MODE_001
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
NO
SIGNAL NAME
201 MOD_002
202 MOD_003
CONTENTS
IEC-MODE_002
IEC-MODE_003
203 MOD_004
204 MOD_005
205 MOD_006
NO
SIGNAL NAME
251 MOD_052
252 MOD_053
CONTENTS
IEC-MODE_052
IEC-MODE_053
IEC-MODE_004
IEC-MODE_005
IEC-MODE_006
253 MOD_054
254 MOD_055
255 MOD_056
IEC-MODE_054
IEC-MODE_055
IEC-MODE_056
206 MOD_007
207 MOD_008
208 MOD_009
IEC-MODE_007
IEC-MODE_008
IEC-MODE_009
256 MOD_057
257 MOD_058
258 MOD_059
IEC-MODE_057
IEC-MODE_058
IEC-MODE_059
209 MOD_010
210 MOD_011
211 MOD_012
IEC-MODE_010
IEC-MODE_011
IEC-MODE_012
259 MOD_060
260 MOD_061
261 MOD_062
IEC-MODE_060
IEC-MODE_061
IEC-MODE_062
212 MOD_013
213 MOD_014
214 MOD_015
IEC-MODE_013
IEC-MODE_014
IEC-MODE_015
262 MOD_063
263 MOD_064
264 MOD_065
IEC-MODE_063
IEC-MODE_064
IEC-MODE_065
215 MOD_016
216 MOD_017
217 MOD_018
IEC-MODE_016
IEC-MODE_017
IEC-MODE_018
265 MOD_066
266 MOD_067
267 MOD_068
IEC-MODE_066
IEC-MODE_067
IEC-MODE_068
218 MOD_019
219 MOD_020
220 MOD_021
IEC-MODE_019
IEC-MODE_020
IEC-MODE_021
268 MOD_069
269 MOD_070
270 MOD_071
IEC-MODE_069
IEC-MODE_070
IEC-MODE_071
221 MOD_022
222 MOD_023
223 MOD_024
IEC-MODE_022
IEC-MODE_023
IEC-MODE_024
271 MOD_072
272 MOD_073
273 MOD_074
IEC-MODE_072
IEC-MODE_073
IEC-MODE_074
224 MOD_025
225 MOD_026
226 MOD_027
IEC-MODE_025
IEC-MODE_026
IEC-MODE_027
274 MOD_075
275 MOD_076
276 MOD_077
IEC-MODE_075
IEC-MODE_076
IEC-MODE_077
227 MOD_028
228 MOD_029
229 MOD_030
IEC-MODE_028
IEC-MODE_029
IEC-MODE_030
277 MOD_078
278 MOD_079
279 MOD_080
IEC-MODE_078
IEC-MODE_079
IEC-MODE_080
230 MOD_031
231 MOD_032
232 MOD_033
IEC-MODE_031
IEC-MODE_032
IEC-MODE_033
280 MOD_081
281 MOD_082
282 MOD_083
IEC-MODE_081
IEC-MODE_082
IEC-MODE_083
233 MOD_034
234 MOD_035
235 MOD_036
IEC-MODE_034
IEC-MODE_035
IEC-MODE_036
283 MOD_084
284 MOD_085
285 MOD_086
IEC-MODE_084
IEC-MODE_085
IEC-MODE_086
236 MOD_037
237 MOD_038
238 MOD_039
IEC-MODE_037
IEC-MODE_038
IEC-MODE_039
286 MOD_087
287 MOD_088
288 MOD_089
IEC-MODE_087
IEC-MODE_088
IEC-MODE_089
239 MOD_040
240 MOD_041
241 MOD_042
IEC-MODE_040
IEC-MODE_041
IEC-MODE_042
289 MOD_090
290 MOD_091
291 MOD_092
IEC-MODE_090
IEC-MODE_091
IEC-MODE_092
242 MOD_043
243 MOD_044
244 MOD_045
IEC-MODE_043
IEC-MODE_044
IEC-MODE_045
292 MOD_093
293 MOD_094
294 MOD_095
IEC-MODE_093
IEC-MODE_094
IEC-MODE_095
245 MOD_046
246 MOD_047
247 MOD_048
IEC-MODE_046
IEC-MODE_047
IEC-MODE_048
295 MOD_096
296 MOD_097
297 MOD_098
IEC-MODE_096
IEC-MODE_097
IEC-MODE_098
248 MOD_049
249 MOD_050
IEC-MODE_049
IEC-MODE_050
298 MOD_099
299 MOD_100
IEC-MODE_099
IEC-MODE_100
250 MOD_051
IEC-MODE_051
300 BEH_001
IEC-Behavier_001
⎯ 200 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
NO
SIGNAL NAME
301 BEH_002
302 BEH_003
CONTENTS
IEC-Behavier_002
IEC-Behavier_003
303 BEH_004
304 BEH_005
305 BEH_006
NO
SIGNAL NAME
351 BEH_052
352 BEH_053
CONTENTS
IEC-Behavier_052
IEC-Behavier_053
IEC-Behavier_004
IEC-Behavier_005
IEC-Behavier_006
353 BEH_054
354 BEH_055
355 BEH_056
IEC-Behavier_054
IEC-Behavier_055
IEC-Behavier_056
306 BEH_007
307 BEH_008
308 BEH_009
IEC-Behavier_007
IEC-Behavier_008
IEC-Behavier_009
356 BEH_057
357 BEH_058
358 BEH_059
IEC-Behavier_057
IEC-Behavier_058
IEC-Behavier_059
309 BEH_010
310 BEH_011
311 BEH_012
IEC-Behavier_010
IEC-Behavier_011
IEC-Behavier_012
359 BEH_060
360 BEH_061
361 BEH_062
IEC-Behavier_060
IEC-Behavier_061
IEC-Behavier_062
312 BEH_013
313 BEH_014
314 BEH_015
IEC-Behavier_013
IEC-Behavier_014
IEC-Behavier_015
362 BEH_063
363 BEH_064
364 BEH_065
IEC-Behavier_063
IEC-Behavier_064
IEC-Behavier_065
315 BEH_016
316 BEH_017
317 BEH_018
IEC-Behavier_016
IEC-Behavier_017
IEC-Behavier_018
365 BEH_066
366 BEH_067
367 BEH_068
IEC-Behavier_066
IEC-Behavier_067
IEC-Behavier_068
318 BEH_019
319 BEH_020
320 BEH_021
IEC-Behavier_019
IEC-Behavier_020
IEC-Behavier_021
368 BEH_069
369 BEH_070
370 BEH_071
IEC-Behavier_069
IEC-Behavier_070
IEC-Behavier_071
321 BEH_022
322 BEH_023
323 BEH_024
IEC-Behavier_022
IEC-Behavier_023
IEC-Behavier_024
371 BEH_072
372 BEH_073
373 BEH_074
IEC-Behavier_072
IEC-Behavier_073
IEC-Behavier_074
324 BEH_025
325 BEH_026
326 BEH_027
IEC-Behavier_025
IEC-Behavier_026
IEC-Behavier_027
374 BEH_075
375 BEH_076
376 BEH_077
IEC-Behavier_075
IEC-Behavier_076
IEC-Behavier_077
327 BEH_028
328 BEH_029
329 BEH_030
IEC-Behavier_028
IEC-Behavier_029
IEC-Behavier_030
377 BEH_078
378 BEH_079
379 BEH_080
IEC-Behavier_078
IEC-Behavier_079
IEC-Behavier_080
330 BEH_031
331 BEH_032
332 BEH_033
IEC-Behavier_031
IEC-Behavier_032
IEC-Behavier_033
380 BEH_081
381 BEH_082
382 BEH_083
IEC-Behavier_081
IEC-Behavier_082
IEC-Behavier_083
333 BEH_034
334 BEH_035
335 BEH_036
IEC-Behavier_034
IEC-Behavier_035
IEC-Behavier_036
383 BEH_084
384 BEH_085
385 BEH_086
IEC-Behavier_084
IEC-Behavier_085
IEC-Behavier_086
336 BEH_037
337 BEH_038
338 BEH_039
IEC-Behavier_037
IEC-Behavier_038
IEC-Behavier_039
386 BEH_087
387 BEH_088
388 BEH_089
IEC-Behavier_087
IEC-Behavier_088
IEC-Behavier_089
339 BEH_040
340 BEH_041
341 BEH_042
IEC-Behavier_040
IEC-Behavier_041
IEC-Behavier_042
389 BEH_090
390 BEH_091
391 BEH_092
IEC-Behavier_090
IEC-Behavier_091
IEC-Behavier_092
342 BEH_043
343 BEH_044
344 BEH_045
IEC-Behavier_043
IEC-Behavier_044
IEC-Behavier_045
392 BEH_093
393 BEH_094
394 BEH_095
IEC-Behavier_093
IEC-Behavier_094
IEC-Behavier_095
345 BEH_046
346 BEH_047
347 BEH_048
IEC-Behavier_046
IEC-Behavier_047
IEC-Behavier_048
395 BEH_096
396 BEH_097
397 BEH_098
IEC-Behavier_096
IEC-Behavier_097
IEC-Behavier_098
348 BEH_049
349 BEH_050
IEC-Behavier_049
IEC-Behavier_050
398 BEH_099
399 BEH_100
IEC-Behavier_099
IEC-Behavier_100
350 BEH_051
IEC-Behavier_051
400 Const0
Const0
⎯ 201 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
NO
SIGNAL NAME
401 Const1
402 Const2
CONTENTS
Const1
Const2
403 Const3
404 Const4
405 Const5
Const3
Const4
Const5
NO
SIGNAL NAME
451
452
453
454
455
406
407
408
456
457
458
409
410
411
459
460
461
412
413
414
462
463
464
415
416
417
465
466
467
418
419
420
468
469
470
421
422
423
471
472
473
424
425
426
474
475
476
477
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
450
⎯ 202 ⎯
CONTENTS
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Control Table
NO
SIGNAL NAME
0 LEDRST_SIG
1 LEDRST_ORCAT
CONTENTS
LED Reset
Control - LED Reset Originator category
2 LEDRST_ORID
Control - LED Reset Originator category
3 LEDRST_ORCAT_ST
Status - LED Rst Originator category
4 LEDRST_ORID_ST
Status - LED Rst Originator category
5 RESERVE
Reserve
6 RESERVE
Reserve
7 RESERVE
Reserve
8 RESERVE
Reserve
9 RESERVE
Reserve
10 MOD_CHECK
MOD_CHECK
11 MOD_CTLNUM
MOD_CTLNUM
12 MOD_CTLVAL
MOD_CTLVAL
13 MOD_ORCAT
MOD_ORCAT
14 MOD_ORIDENT
MOD_ORIDENT
15 MOD_TEST
MOD_TEST
16 MOD_CTLMDL
MOD_CTLMDL
17 MOD_ST_ORCAT
MOD_ST_ORCAT
18 MOD_ST_ORIDENT
MOD_ST_ORIDENT
19 MOD_SELECT
MOD_SELECT
20 MOD_SBOTIMEOUT
MOD_SBOTIMEOUT
21 MOD_SBOCLASS
MOD_SBOCLASS
⎯ 203 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 204 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix C
Event Record Items
⎯ 205 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Event record
Default setting
No.
Name
Range
Unit
Contents
Signal No.
Signal name
Signal No.
Signal Name
Model
110D
Type
400D
420D
1
EV1
0 - 3071
－
Event record signal
768
BI1 command
x
On/Off
2
EV2
0 - 3071
－
ditto
769
BI2 command
x
On/Off
3
EV3
0 - 3071
－
ditto
770
BI3 command
x
On/Off
4
EV4
0 - 3071
－
ditto
771
BI4 command
x
On/Off
5
EV5
0 - 3071
－
ditto
772
BI5 command
x
On/Off
6
EV6
0 - 3071
－
ditto
773
BI6 command
x
On/Off
7
EV7
0 - 3071
－
ditto
774
BI7 command
x
On/Off
8
EV8
0 - 3071
－
ditto
775
BI8 command
x
On/Off
9
EV9
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1639
Ind reset
x
On/Off
10
EV10
0 - 3071
－
ditto
371
GEN trip
x
On/Off
GEN alarm
x
On/Off
11
EV11
0 - 3071
－
ditto
380
12
EV12
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
13
EV13
0 - 3071
－
ditto
140
CBF trip
ARC shot
--
On/Off
x
On/Off
x
On/Off
14
EV14
0 - 3071
－
ditto
223
15
EV15
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
16
EV16
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
17
EV17
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
18
EV18
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
19
EV19
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
20
EV20
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
21
EV21
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
22
EV22
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
23
EV23
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
24
EV24
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1251
Relay fail
--
On/Off
x
On/Off
25
EV25
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1266
CT err
26
EV26
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
27
EV27
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
--
x
On/Off
28
EV28
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
29
EV29
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
30
EV30
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
31
EV31
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
32
EV32
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
33
EV33
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
34
EV34
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
35
EV35
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
36
EV36
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
37
EV37
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
38
EV38
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
39
EV39
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
40
EV40
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
41
EV41
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
42
EV42
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
43
EV43
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
44
EV44
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
45
EV45
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
46
EV46
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
47
EV47
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
48
EV48
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
49
EV49
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1258
Ry fail-A
x
On/Off
50
EV50
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1438
Data lost
x
On/Off
51
EV51
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
52
EV52
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
53
EV53
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
54
EV54
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
55
EV55
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
56
EV56
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
57
EV57
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
58
EV58
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
59
EV59
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
60
EV60
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
61
EV61
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
62
EV62
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
63
EV63
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
64
EV64
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
⎯ 206 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Event record
Default setting
No.
Name
Range
Unit
Contents
Signal No.
Signal name
Signal No.
Signal Name
Model
110D
Type
400D
420D
65
EV65
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
66
EV66
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
67
EV67
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
68
EV68
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
69
EV69
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
70
EV70
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
71
EV71
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
72
EV72
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
73
EV73
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
74
EV74
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
75
EV75
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
76
EV76
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
77
EV77
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
78
EV78
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
79
EV79
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
80
EV80
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
81
EV81
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
82
EV82
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
83
EV83
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
84
EV84
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
85
EV85
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
86
EV86
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
87
EV87
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
88
EV88
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
89
EV89
0 - 3071
－
ditto
471
BO1 operate
x
On/Off
90
EV90
0 - 3071
－
ditto
472
BO2 operate
x
On/Off
91
EV91
0 - 3071
－
ditto
473
BO3 operate
x
On/Off
92
EV92
0 - 3071
－
ditto
474
BO4 operate
x
On/Off
93
EV93
0 - 3071
－
ditto
475
BO5 operate
x
On/Off
94
EV94
0 - 3071
－
ditto
476
BO6 operate
x
On/Off
BO7 operate
95
EV95
0 - 3071
－
ditto
477
x
On/Off
96
EV96
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
97
EV97
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
98
EV98
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
99
EV99
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
100
EV100
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On/Off
101
EV101
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2640
SET.GROUP1
x
On
102
EV102
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2641
SET.GROUP2
x
On
103
EV103
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2642
SET.GROUP3
x
On
104
EV104
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2643
SET.GROUP4
x
On
105
EV105
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2644
SET.GROUP5
x
On
106
EV106
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2645
SET.GROUP6
x
On
107
EV107
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2646
SET.GROUP7
x
On
108
EV108
0 - 3071
－
ditto
2647
SET.GROUP8
x
On
109
EV109
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1448
Sys. change
x
On
110
EV110
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1449
Rly. change
x
On
Grp. change
x
On
111
EV111
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1450
112
EV112
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
113
EV113
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1272
TC alarm
--
On
x
On
114
EV114
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1273
SGM_Iy alarm
--
x
On
115
EV115
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1274
OT alarm
--
x
On
116
EV116
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On
117
EV117
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
--
On
118
EV118
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
119
EV119
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1445
120
EV120
0 - 3071
－
ditto
0
121
EV121
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1409
PLC data CHG
LED RST
--
On
x
On
--
On
x
On
122
EV122
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1435
F.record_CLR
x
On
123
EV123
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1436
E.record_CLR
x
On
On
124
EV124
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1437
D.record_CLR
x
125
EV125
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1439
TP_COUNT_CLR
x
126
EV126
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1440
Iy_COUNT_CLR
--
On
x
On
127
EV127
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1441
AR_COUNT_CLR
x
On
128
EV128
0 - 3071
－
ditto
1442
DEMAND_CLR
x
On
⎯ 207 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 208 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix D
Binary Output Default Setting List
⎯ 209 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
Setting
Device
Name
Range
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #3
In #4
In #5
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
In #1
In #2
In #3
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #4
In #5
In #6
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
In #2
In #3
In #4
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Reset
In #1
In #2
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #3
In #4
In #5
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #6
TBO
Logic
Reset
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
In #1
In #2
In #3
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #4
In #5
In #6
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
TBO
Logic
Reset
In #1
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
In #2
In #3
In #4
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
In #5
In #6
TBO
Logic
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
OR - AND
Reset
In #1
In #2
Unit
Contents
Setting
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
s
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
OR
Dl
371
0
ditto
ditto
ditto
110D
Signal Name
--GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
0
0.20
OR
Dl
Output signal
ditto
ditto
371
0
0
ditto
ditto
ditto
0.20
OR
Dl
371
ditto
ditto
ditto
OR
Dl
371
0
--GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
---GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
Default Setting
400D
Setting
Signal Name
0
0.20
OR
Dl
371
0
0
0.20
OR
Dl
371
OR
Dl
371
0
---GEN.TRIP
0
0.20
OR
Dl
371
0
0
---GEN.TRIP
0.20
OR
Dl
101
0
0
0
0
0
0
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
0
0
0.20
OR
0
0
0.20
OR
0
0
0.20
OR
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
Dl
117
0
ditto
ditto
ditto
-EF1_TRIP
0
0
0
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
0
0.20
OR
Dl
Output signal
ditto
ditto
117
0
0
ditto
ditto
ditto
0.20
OR
Dl
0
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
---OC1_TRIP
0
0
0
---EF1_TRIP
0
0
0
Dl/Dw timer
Logic gate
Reset application
Output signal
Dl
101
0
0
0.20
OR
Dl
117
0
0
0.20
OR
Dl
0
Dl
117
0
---EF1_TRIP
0
0.20
OR
Dl
121
0
0
----
0.20
OR
Dl
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.20
OR
0
0
0.20
OR
0
0
0.20
OR
Ins - Dl - Dw - Lat
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Reset application
Output signal
ditto
Dl
0
0
In #3
In #4
In #5
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
－
－
－
ditto
ditto
ditto
0
0
0
In #6
TBO
0 - 3071
0.00 - 10.00
－
s
ditto
Dl/Dw timer
0
0.20
⎯ 210 ⎯
----
Dl
0
0
----
0
0
0
--
0
0.20
GEN.TRIP
---OC1_TRIP
---EF1_TRIP
---SEF1-S1_TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
－
－
－
－
----
0
0
0
0
0
0
----
--GEN.TRIP
0
0
0
0
0
0
---
420D
Signal Name
0
0
0
0
0
0
---GEN.TRIP
Setting
Dl
0
0
----
----
0
0
0
--
0
0.20
--
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix E
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation
⎯ 211 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
MENU
xRecord
xStatus
xSet. (view)
xSet. (change)
xTest
/1 Record
xF. record
xE. record
xD. record
xCounter
/2 F.record
xDisplay
/3 F.record
xClear
#1 16/Jul/2002
18:13:57.031
Refer to Section
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 E.record
xDisplay
/3 E.record
xClear
16/Jul/2002
Ext. trip A On
Refer to Section
4.2.3.2.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 D.record
xDisplay
/3 D.record
xClear
#1 16/Jul/2002
18:13:57.401
Refer to Section
4.2.3.3.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1 b-1
⎯ 212 ⎯
/4 F.record #1
16/Jul/2002
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1 b-1
/2 Counter
xDisplay
/3 Counter
Trips *****
xClear
xClear
xClear
xClear
xClear
xClear
xClear
TripsA *****
TripsB *****
TripsC *****
Σ I^yA ******E6
Σ I^yB ******E6
Σ I^yC ******E6
Trips
Trips A
Trips B
Trips C
Σ I^yA
Σ I^yB
Σ I^yC
Refer to Section
4.2.3.4.
Clear Trips?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
⎯ 213 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1
/1 Status
xMetering
xBinary I/O
xRelay element
xTime sync.
xClock adjust.
xLCD contrast
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
/2 Metering
xCurrent
xDemand
/2 Binary I/O
IP [0000 0000]
/2 Ry element
A OC1-4[0000 ]
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 12/Nov/2002
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
xVersion
xDescription
xComms
xRecord
xStatus
xProtection
xBinary I/P
xBinary O/P
xLED
/2 Version
xRelay type
xSerial No.
xSoftware
/2 Description
xPlant name
Refer to Section 4.2.5
GRD110-400D-10
-A0
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗∗∗
GSPDM1-01-*
xDescription
/2 Comms
xAddr./Param.
xSwitch
/3 Addr./Param.
IEC
2
/3 Switch
a-1, b-1
⎯ 214 ⎯
/3 Current
la
**.** kA
/3 Demand
lamax
**.** kA
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1 b-1
/2 Record
xE.record
xD.record
xCounter
/4 Signal No.
BITRN
100
/3 E.record
xSignal No.
/4 Event name
xEvent name
/3 D.record
xTime/starter
xScheme sw
xBinary sig.
xSignal name
/4 Time/starter
Time
2.0s
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1
∗∗∗
/4 Signal name
/3 Counter
xScheme sw
/4 Scheme sw
xAlarm set
/2 Status
xMetering
xTime sync.
xTime zone
/2 Act. gp. =*
xCommon
xGroup1
:
xGroup8
/3 Metering
/3 Time sync.
/3 Time zone
GMT
+9hrs
/3 Common
/3 Group1
xParameter
xTrip
xARC
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
⎯ 215 ⎯
/4 Alarm set
TCALM 10000
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
/4 Parameter
xLine name
xCT ratio
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
∗∗∗∗∗∗
/5 CT ratio
OCCT
400
/6 Application
/4 Trip
xScheme sw
/6 OC
xProt.element
/5 Scheme sw
xApplication
xOC
xEF
xSEF
xNOC
xMisc.
xCold Load
/6 EF
/6 SEF
/6 NOC
/6 Misc.
/6 Cold Load
/5 Prot.element
xOC
xEF
xSEF
xNOC
xMisc.
xCold Load
/6 OC
OC1
1.00A
/6 EF
EF1
0.30A
/6 SEF
SE1
0.010A
/6 NOC
NC1
0.40A
/6 Misc.
UC1
0.20A
/6 Cold Load
OC1
2.00A
a-1
b-1
C-1
d-1
⎯ 216 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1
b-1
c-1 d-1
/4 ARC
xScheme sw
/5 Scheme SW
xGeneral
xARC element
xOC
xEF
xSEF
xMisc
/5 ARC element
TRDY
60.0s
/6 General
/6 OC
/6 EF
/6 SEF
/3 Group2
xParameter
/6 Misc
/3 Group8
xParameter
/2 Binary I/P
xTimers
/4 Timers
xFunctions
/4 Functions
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, D
1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1004, 1005
BO2 AND, DL
∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗
BO7 OR, L
∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗, ∗∗∗∗
BO1TBO 0.20s
BO7TBO
0.20s
/2 LED
xLED
/3 LED
LED1 AND, I
xVirtual LED
/3 Virtual LED
xIND1
/4 LED1
BIT1
I,O
/4 LED6
BIT1
I,O
xIND2
a-1 b-1
⎯ 217 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1
/1 Set.(change)
xPassword
xDescription
xComms
xRecord
xStatus
xProtection
xBinary I/P
xBinary O/P
xLED
: Password trap
Password [_ ]
1234567890←
: Confirmation trap
Change settings?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Password
xSetting
Input
[_ ]
1234567890←
xTest
Refer to Section 4.2.6.2.
/2 Description
xPlant name
_
xDescription
xAlarm1 Text
:
xAlarm4 Text
/2 Comms
xAddr./Param.
Retype
[_ ]
1234567890←
ABCDEFG
_
ABCDEFG
/3 Addr./Param.
/3 Switch
xSwitch
Refer to Section
4.2.6.4.
/2 Record
xE.record
/3 E.record
xD.record
xCounter
xBITRN
100 _
:
Refer to Section
4.2.6.5.
/3 D.record
xTime/starter
xScheme sw
xBinary sig.
/3 Counter
xScheme sw
xAlarm set
a-1 b-2
⎯ 218 ⎯
/4 Time/starter
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
/4 Scheme sw
/4 Alarm set
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1 b-2
/3 Metering
/2 Status
xMetering
xTime sync.
xTime zone
/3 Time sync.
/3 Time zone
/2 Protection
xChange act. gp.
xChange set.
xCopy gp.
Refer to Section
4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
xCommon
xGroup1
xGroup2
:
xGroup8
/4 Common
/4 Group1
xParameter
xTrip
xARC
/5 Parameter
xLine name
xCT ratio
a-1 b-2
_
ABCDEFG
/6 CT ratio
c-2 d-2 e-2
⎯ 219 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
e-2
/5 Trip
xScheme sw
/6 Scheme sw
xApplication
xProt.element
xOC
xEF
xSEF
xNOC
xMisc.
xCold Load
/7 Application
/7 OC
/7 EF
/7 SEF
/7 NOC
/7 Misc.
/7 Cold Load
/6 Prot.element
xOC
xEF
xSEF
xNOC
xMisc.
xCold Load
/7 OC
/7 EF
/7 SEF
/7 NOC
/7 Misc.
/7 Cold Load
a-1, b-2 c-2 d-2 e-2
⎯ 220 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
e-2
/5 ARC
xScheme sw
/6 Scheme SW
xGeneral
/7 General
xARC element
xOC
xEF
xSEF
xMisc
/7 OC
/6 ARC element
/4 Group2
xParameter
/7 EF
/7 SEF
/7 Misc
/4 Group8
xParameter
/3 Copy A to B
A
_
B
_
/2 Binary I/P
xBI1
/3 BI1
xTimers
xBI2
xBI3
xBI4
xBI5
xBI6
xBI7
xBI8
xFunctions
/4 Timers
/4 Functions
/3 BI8
xTimers
xFunctions
/2 Binary O/P
xBO1
/3 BO1
xLogic/Reset
xFunctions
xBO7
Refer to Section
4.2.6.9.
/2 LED
xLED
xVirtual LED
a-1,
/3 BO7
xLogic/Reset
xFunctions
Refer to Section
4.2.6.10.
C-3
⎯ 221 ⎯
/4 Logic/Reset
/4 Functions
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
a-1
c-3
/3 LED
xLED1
/4 LED1
xLogic/Reset
xFunctions
xLED6
/5 Logic/Reset
/5 Functions
/4 LED6
xLogic/Reset
xFunctions
/3 Virtual LED
xIND1
/4 IND1
xReset
xIND2
xFunctions
/5 Reset
/5 Functions
/4 IND2
xReset
xFunctions
/1 Test
xSwitch
/2 Switch
xBinary O/P
xLogic circuit
A.M.F.
Off/On
CLPTST
Off/S0/S3
THMRST
Off/On
SHOTNUM
Off/S1-S6
IECTST
Off/On
Refer to Section 4.2.7.
: Password trap
Password [_ ]
1234567890←
1 _
0
0
0
0
/2 Binary O/P
BO1
0 _
Disable/Enable
FAIL
0
Disable/Enable
/2 Logic
circuit
TermA
1
_
TermB
1001
_
⎯ 222 ⎯
Operate?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
MODE
1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED
ITEMS
NORMAL
(DISPLAY OFF)
VIEW
PRESS ANY
BUTTON
EXCEPT FOR
"VIEW" AND
"RESET"
2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN
1=RECORD
MENU
( DISPLAY ON )
1=FAULT RECORD
2=EVENT RECORD
3=DISTURBANCE RECORD
METERING 1
( DISPLAY ON )
4=COUNTER
2=STATUS
VIEW
RESET
1=METERING
2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT
METERING 5
( DISPLAY ON )
VIEW
AUTOMODE 1
3=RELAY ELELMENT
TRIP OUTPUT
ISSUED !
5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
4=TIME SYNC SOURCE
RESET
TRIP
( LED ON )
3=SETTING
(VIEW)
1=RELAY VERSION
LATEST FAULT *
( DISPLAY ON )
2=DESCRIPTION
AUTOMODE 2
3=COMMUNICATION
4=RECORD
RELAY
FAILED !
VIEW
5=STATUS
RESET
ALARM
( LED ON )
6=PROTECTION
7=BINARY INPUT
8=BINARY OUTPUT
AUTO SUPERVISON *
( DISPLAY ON )
9=LED
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA
IS STORED
VIEW
RESET
4=SETTING
(CHANGE)
Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu
5=TEST
1=SWITCH
2=BINARY OUTPUT
⎯ 223 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 224 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix F
Case Outline
⎯ 225 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
I N SERVICE
RESET
A
B
258
VI EW
T RIP
ALARM
0V CAN
CEL ENTER
END
15.6
104
185.2
32
Side view
Front view
4 holes-φ5.5
4 holes-φ4.5
OPT
T
TB1
TB3
TB1
TB2
R
TB3
F1
R
T
E
E
Rear view for
Fibre optic port + 100BASE-FX
Rear view for
RS485 + 100BASE-TX
56
102
Panel cut-out
TB3
TB1
1
3
5
7
A1
A1
2
4
6
8
TB2
B1
B1
Terminal
Application
TB3: A1 – A3
RS485 I/F
TB3: B1 – B2
IRIG-B
OPT
Fibre optic for IEC 60870-5-103
T1
100BASE-TX
F1
100BASE-FX
TB1,TB2,TB3: Screw terminal (M3.5 Ring)
T1: RJ45
A10
OPT: ST connector
B10
F1: SC connector
A18
B18
Terminal block
Case Outline
⎯ 226 ⎯
24 9
T1
239
TB2
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix G
Typical External Connection
⎯ 227 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
GRD110 - 110
BUSBAR
CT
OUTPUT CONTACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
TB3B4
Core balance
CT
CB
IE
ISE
BO2
A7
B7
A6
B6
BO3
B8
A8
A9
B9
FRAME EARTH
(P)
BI1
COMMAND
BI2
COMMAND
BI3
COMMAND
BI4
COMMAND
BI5
COMMAND
BI6
COMMAND
BI7
COMMAND
BI8
COMMAND
TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
A4
A5
B5
BO1
TB15
6
7
8
BI1
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
A10
B10
A11
B11
BO4
BI2
BI3
A13
BI4
B13
A12
B12
BO5
BI5
A14
BI6
B14
A15
B15
BO6
BI7
A16
BI8
BO7
B16
FAIL
A17
A18
B18
(N)
B17
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY
(+)
COM-A
TB2- A9
B9
(-)
DC-DC
0V
RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103 - option (Sheathed cable)
B10
FRAME EARTH
E
A1
COM-B
A3
COM-0V
A10
(∗)
TB3-A2
+5Vdc
CASE EARTH
OPT
T
R
TX
FX
Opt. I/F for IEC60870-5-103 (option)
Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-TX:option)
Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100 (100Base-FX:option)
TB3-B2
B1
IRIG-B
(∗)This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.
⎯ 228 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
GRD110 - 400, “3P” setting
BUSBAR
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CT
CB
IA
IC
IN
B7
A6
B6
BO2
BI1
COMMAND
BI2
COMMAND
BI3
COMMAND
BI4
COMMAND
BI5
COMMAND
BI6
COMMAND
BI7
COMMAND
BI8
COMMAND
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
B8
A8
A9
B9
BO3
TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
A4
A5
B5
A7
BO1
IB
FRAME EARTH
(P)
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB3B4
BI1
A10
B10
A11
B11
BO4
BI2
BI3
A13
BI4
B13
A12
B12
BO5
BI5
A14
BI6
B14
A15
B15
BO6
BI7
A16
BI8
BO7
B16
(N)
B17
A17
A18
B18
FAIL
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY
(+)
COM-A
TB2- A9
+5Vdc
DC-DC
B9
(-)
0V
B10
FRAME EARTH
E
A1
COM-B
A3
COM-0V
A10
(∗)
TB3-A2
CASE EARTH
OPT
T
R
TX
FX
TB3-B2
B1
IRIG-B
⎯ 229 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
BUSBAR
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CT
CB
IA
IC
BI1
TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
COMMAND
BI2
COMMAND
BI3
COMMAND
BI4
COMMAND
BI5
COMMAND
BI6
COMMAND
BI7
COMMAND
BI8
COMMAND
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
A4
A5
B5
BO1
IN
BO2
A7
B7
A6
B6
BO3
B8
A8
A9
B9
FRAME EARTH
(P)
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB3B4
BI1
A10
BI2
B10
A11
B11
BO4
BI3
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
A13
BI4
B13
A12
B12
BO5
BI5
A14
BI6
B14
A15
B15
BO6
BI7
BI8
A16
B16
BO7
(N)
B17
A17
A18
B18
FAIL
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY
(+)
TB2- A9
+5Vdc
B9
(-)
COM-A
TB3-A2
DC-DC
0V
A1
COM-B
A10
A3
COM-0V
B10
(∗)
FRAME EARTH
E
OPT
T
R
CASE EARTH
TX
FX
TB3-B2
B1
IRIG-B
⎯ 230 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
BUSBAR
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CT
CB
IN
B7
A6
B6
BO2
BI1
COMMAND
BI2
COMMAND
BI3
COMMAND
BI4
COMMAND
BI5
COMMAND
BI6
COMMAND
BI7
COMMAND
BI8
COMMAND
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
B8
A8
A9
B9
BO3
TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
A4
A5
B5
A7
BO1
FRAME EARTH
(P)
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB3B4
BI1
A10
BI2
B10
A11
B11
BO4
BI3
A13
BI4
B13
A12
B12
BO5
BI5
A14
BI6
B14
A15
B15
BO6
BI7
A16
BI8
BO7
B16
FAIL
A17
A18
B18
(N)
B17
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY
(+)
TB2- A9
+5Vdc
B9
(-)
COM-A
TB3-A2
DC-DC
0V
A1
COM-B
A10
A3
COM-0V
B10
(∗)
FRAME EARTH
E
OPT
T
R
CASE EARTH
TX
FX
TB3-B2
B1
IRIG-B
⎯ 231 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
BUSBAR
CT
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Core balance
CT
CB
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB3B4
IA
IC
ISE
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
A4
A5
B5
A7
BO1
IB
B7
A6
B6
BO2
FRAME EARTH
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
B8
(P)
BI1
COMMAND
BI2
COMMAND
BI3
COMMAND
BI4
COMMAND
BI5
COMMAND
BI6
COMMAND
BI7
COMMAND
BI8
COMMAND
A8
A9
B9
BO3
TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
BI1
A10
B10
A11
B11
BO4
BI2
BI3
A13
BI4
B13
A12
B12
BO5
BI5
A14
BI6
B14
A15
B15
BO6
BI7
A16
BI8
BO7
B16
FAIL
A17
A18
B18
(N)
B17
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY
(+)
+5Vdc
B9
(-)
DC-DC
0V
B10
FRAME EARTH
E
A1
COM-B
A3
COM-0V
A10
(∗)
TB3-A2
COM-A
TB2- A9
OPT
CASE EARTH
T
R
TX
FX
TB3-B2
B1
IRIG-B
⎯ 232 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
BUSBAR
CT
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Core balance
CT
CB
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB3B4
IA
IN
ISE
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
A4
A5
B5
A7
BO1
IC
B7
A6
B6
BO2
FRAME EARTH
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
B8
BO3
(P)
BI1
COMMAND
BI2
COMMAND
BI3
COMMAND
BI4
COMMAND
BI5
COMMAND
BI6
COMMAND
BI7
COMMAND
BI8
COMMAND
A8
A9
B9
TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
BI1
A10
B10
A11
B11
BO4
BI2
BI3
A13
BI4
B13
A12
B12
BO5
BI5
A14
BI6
B14
A15
B15
BO6
BI7
BI8
A16
B16
BO7
(N)
B17
A17
A18
B18
FAIL
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY
(+)
COM-A
TB2- A9
+5Vdc
DC-DC
B9
(-)
0V
B10
FRAME EARTH
E
A1
COM-B
A3
COM-0V
A10
(∗)
TB3-A2
CASE EARTH
OPT
T
R
TX
FX
TB3-B2
B1
IRIG-B
⎯ 233 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
BUSBAR
CT
TB11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Core balance
CT
CB
BI1
COMMAND
BI2
COMMAND
BI3
COMMAND
BI4
COMMAND
BI5
COMMAND
BI6
COMMAND
BI7
COMMAND
BI8
COMMAND
IE
ISE
TB2A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
A4
A5
B5
A7
BO1
B7
A6
B6
BO2
FRAME EARTH
(P)
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB3B4
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
GENERAL TRIP
OC1 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
B8
A8
A9
B9
BO3
BI1
BI2
A10
B10
A11
B11
BO4
BI3
BI4
A13
B13
A12
B12
BO5
BI5
BI6
A14
BI7
B14
A15
B15
BO6
BI8
A16
B16
BO7
(N)
B17
A17
A18
B18
FAIL
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
DC
SUPPLY
(+)
TB2- A9
+5Vdc
DC-DC
B9
(-)
0V
A10
FRAME EARTH
E
TB3-A2
A1
COM-B
B10
(∗)
COM-A
A3
COM-0V
CASE EARTH
OPT
T
R
TX
FX
TB3-B2
B1
IRIG-B
⎯ 234 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
⎯ 235 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
1. Relay Identification
Date:
Relay type
Serial Number
Frequency
AC current
DC supply voltage
Password
Active setting group
2. Line parameter
CT ratio
OC:
EF:
3. Contacts setting
TB3
Terminal A5(B5)-B4, A4
Terminal A6(B6)-A7, B7
Terminal A9(B9)-B8, A8
Terminal B16-A16
⎯ 236 ⎯
SEF:
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4. Relay setting sheet
№
Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)
Range
Setting Device Name
5A rating
Units
Contents
1A rating
User setting
World wide
110D
400D
420D
1
Active group
1- 8
－
Active setting group
2
APPL
Off - 3P - 2P - 1P
－
Application setting of CT
--
1
3P
3
CTSVEN
Off - ALM&BLK - ALM
－
AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable
--
ALM
4
AOLED
Off - On
－
TRIP LED lighting control at alarm output
5
Line name
Specified by user
－
Line name
6
OCCT
1 - 20000
－
Phase CT ratio
7
EFCT
1 - 20000
－
Residual CT ratio
8
SEFCT
1 - 20000
－
SEF CT ratio
9
MOC1
D - IEC - IEEE - US - C
－
OC1 Delay Type
--
10
MOC2
－
OC2 Delay Type
--
11
MEF1
－
EF1 Delay Type
12
MEF2
－
EF2 Delay Type
13
MSE1
－
SEF1 Delay Type
D
--
14
MSE2
－
SEF2 Delay Type
D
--
15
MNC1
－
NOC1 Delay Type
--
MNC2
16
On
no-name
--
400
400
400
--
400
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
－
NOC2 Delay Type
--
D
OC1EN
Off - On
－
OC1 Enable
--
On
18
MOC1C-IEC
NI - VI - EI - LTI
－
OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
--
NI
19
MOC1C-IEEE
MI - VI - EI
－
OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
--
MI
20
MOC1C-US
CO2 - CO8
－
OC1 US Inverse Curve Type
--
CO2
21
OC1R
DEF - DEP
－
OC1 Reset Characteristic
--
DEF
22
OC1-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
--
NA
23
OC2EN
Off - On
－
OC2 Enable
--
Off
24
MOC2C-IEC
NI - VI - EI - LTI
－
OC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
--
NI
25
MOC2C-IEEE
MI - VI - EI
－
OC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
--
MI
26
MOC2C-US
CO2 - CO8
－
OC2 US Inverse Curve Type
--
CO2
27
OC2R
DEF - DEP
－
OC2 Reset Characteristic
--
DEF
28
OC2-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
--
NA
29
OC3EN
Off - On
－
OC3 Enable
--
Off
30
OC3-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
--
NA
31
OC4EN
Off - On
－
OC4 Enable
--
Off
32
OC4-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
--
NA
33
OCTP
3POR - 2OUTOF3
－
OC trip mode
--
3POR
17
34
OC
EF1EN
Off - On - POP
－
EF1 Enable
35
EF
MEF1C-IEC
NI - VI - EI - LTI
－
EF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
On
NI
36
MEF1C-IEEE
MI - VI - EI
－
EF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
MI
37
MEF1C-US
CO2 - CO8
－
EF1 US Inverse Curve Type
CO2
38
EF1R
DEF - DEP
－
EF1 Reset Characteristic
DEF
39
EF1-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
40
EF2EN
Off - On - POP
－
EF2 Enable
--
NA
41
MEF2C-IEC
NI - VI - EI - LTI
－
EF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
NI
42
MEF2C-IEEE
MI - VI - EI
－
EF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
MI
43
MEF2C-US
CO2 - CO8
－
EF2 US Inverse Curve Type
CO2
44
EF2R
DEF - DEP
－
EF2 Reset Characteristic
DEF
Off
45
EF2-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
46
EF3EN
Off - On - POP
－
EF3 Enable
--
NA
Off
47
EF3-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
48
EF4EN
Off - On - POP
－
EF4 Enable
EF4-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
--
SE1EN
Off - On
－
SEF1 Enable
On
--
51
MSE1C-IEC
NI - VI - EI - LTI
－
SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
NI
--
NI
52
MSE1C-IEEE
MI - VI - EI
－
SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
MI
--
MI
53
MSE1C-US
CO2 - CO8
－
SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type
CO2
--
CO2
54
SE1R
DEF - DEP
－
SEF1 Reset Characteristic
DEF
--
DEF
55
SE1S2
Off - On
－
SEF1 Stage 2 Timer Enable
Off
--
56
SE1-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
49
50
SEF
--
NA
Off
NA
--
On
Off
NA
57
SE2EN
Off - On
－
SEF2 Enable
Off
--
58
MSE2C-IEC
NI - VI - EI - LTI
－
SEF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
NI
--
NI
59
MSE2C-IEEE
MI - VI - EI
－
SEF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
MI
--
MI
60
MSE2C-US
CO2 - CO8
－
SEF2 US Inverse Curve Type
CO2
--
CO2
61
SE2R
DEF - DEP
－
SEF2 Reset Characteristic
DEF
--
DEF
62
SE2-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
63
SE3EN
Off - On
－
SEF3 Enable
64
SE3-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
65
SE4EN
Off - On
－
SEF4 Enable
66
SE4-2F
NA - Block
－
2f Block Enable
⎯ 237 ⎯
-Off
NA
--
-Off
Off
NA
---
Off
Off
NA
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
№
Setting Device Name
67
NOC
NC1EN
68
MNC1C-IEC
69
MNC1C-IEEE
70
MNC1C-US
71
NC1R
72
NC1-2F
73
NC2EN
74
MNC2C-IEC
75
MNC2C-IEEE
76
MNC2C-US
77
NC2R
78
NC2-2F
79
UC
UC1EN
80
UC2EN
81 Thermal
THMEN
82
THMAEN
83
BCD
BCDEN
84
BCD-2F
84
CBF
CBFOCEN
84
CBFEFEN
85
BTC
86
RTC
87 Cold Load
CLEN
88
CLDOEN
89
OC
OC1
90
TOC1
91
TOC1M
92
TOC1R
93
TOC1RM
94
OC2
95
TOC2
96
TOC2M
97
TOC2R
98
TOC2RM
99
OC3
100
TOC3
101
OC4
102
TOC4
103
OC1-k
104
OC1-α
105
OC1-C
106
OC1-kr
107
OC1-β
108
OC2-k
109
OC2-α
110
OC2-C
111
OC2-kr
112
OC2-β
113
EF
EF1
114
TEF1
115
TEF1M
116
TEF1R
117
TEF1RM
118
EF2
119
TEF2
120
TEF2M
121
TEF2R
122
TEF2RM
123
EF3
124
TEF3
125
EF4
126
TEF4
127
EF1-k
128
EF1-α
129
EF1-C
130
EF1-kr
131
EF1-β
132
EF2-k
133
EF2-α
134
EF2-C
135
EF2-kr
136
EF2-β
Range
5A rating
1A rating
Off - On
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
NI - VI - EI - LTI
MI - VI - EI
CO2 - CO8
DEF - DEP
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
NA - Block
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - DIR - OC
Off - On
Off - On
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
Units
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
A
s
－
s
－
A
s
－
s
－
A
s
A
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
A
s
－
s
－
A
s
－
s
－
A
s
A
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
Contents
NOC1 Enable
NOC1 IEC InverNC Curve Type
NOC1 IEEE InverNC Curve Type
NOC1 US InverNC Curve Type
NOC1 ReNCt Characteristic
2f Block Enable
NOC2 Enable
NOC2 IEC InverNC Curve Type
NOC2 IEEE InverNC Curve Type
NOC2 US InverNC Curve Type
NOC2 ReNCt Characteristic
2f Block Enable
UC1 Enable
UC2 Enable
Thermal OL Enable
Thermal Alarm Enable
Broken Conductor Enable
2f Block Enable
OCBF trip use or not
EFBF trip use or not
Back-trip control
Re-trip control
Cold Load Protection Enable
Cold Load drop-off Enable
OC1 Threshold setting
OC1 Definite time setting
OC1 Time multiplier setting
OC1 Definite time reset delay
OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
OC2 Time multiplier setting
OC2 Definite time reset delay
OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
EF1 Threshold setting
EF1 EFinite time setting
EF1 Time multiplier setting
EF1 EFinite time reset delay
EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
EF2 Time multiplier setting
EF2 EFinite time reset delay
EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
⎯ 238 ⎯
World wide
110D
400D
420D
-Off
-NI
-MI
-CO2
-DEF
-NA
-Off
-NI
-MI
-CO2
-DEF
-NA
-Off
-Off
-Off
-Off
-Off
-NA
-On
Off
Off
Off
---------------------------
Off
Off
5.0 / 1.00
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
25.0 / 5.00
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
50.0 / 10.00
1.00
100.0 / 20.00
1.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
1.5 / 0.30
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
15.0 / 3.00
1.00
1.000
0.0
1.000
25.0 / 5.00
1.00
50.0 / 10.00
1.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
0.00
User
setting
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
№
Setting Device Name
137
SEF
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
NOC
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
UC
183
184
185
186 Thermal
187
188
189
190
BCD
191
192
CBF
193
194
195
196 Inrush
197
198 Cold Load
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
SE1
TSE1
TSE1M
TSE1R
TSE1RM
TS1S2
SE2
TSE2
TSE2M
TSE2R
TSE2RM
SE3
TSE3
SE4
TSE4
SE1-k
SE1-α
SE1-C
SE1-kr
SE1-β
SE2-k
SE2-α
SE2-C
SE2-kr
SE2-β
NC1
TNC1
TNC1M
TNC1R
TNC1RM
NC2
TNC2
TNC2M
TNC2R
TNC2RM
NC1-k
NC1-α
NC1-C
NC1-kr
NC1-β
NC2-k
NC2-α
NC2-C
NC2-kr
NC2-β
UC1
TUC1
UC2
TUC2
THM
THMIP
TTHM
THMA
BCD
TBCD
CBF
CBFEF
TBTC
TRTC
ICD-2f
ICDOC
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
Range
5A rating
1A rating
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.00 - 300.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.010 - 1.500
0.0 - 300.0
0.010 - 1.500
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.000 - 5.000
0.000 - 30.000
0.00 - 5.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
2.0 - 10.0
0.40 - 2.00
0.0 - 5.0
0.00 - 1.00
0.5 - 500.0
50 - 99
0.10 - 1.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
10 - 50
0.5 - 25.0
0.10 - 5.00
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.1 - 25.0
0.02 - 5.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
Units
A
s
－
s
－
s
A
s
－
s
－
A
s
A
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
A
s
－
s
－
A
s
－
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
A
s
A
s
A
A
min
%
－
s
A
A
s
s
%
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Contents
SEF1 Threshold setting
SEF1 Definite time setting
SEF1 Time multiplier setting
SEF1 Definite time reset delay
SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
SEF1 Stage 2 definite timer settings
SEF2 Time multiplier setting
SEF2 Definite time reset delay
SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
NOC1 Threshold setting
NOC1 Definite time setting
NOC1 Time multiplier setting
NOC1 Definite time reset delay
NOC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
NOC2 Threshold setting
NOC2 Definite time setting
NOC2 Time multiplier setting
NOC2 Definite time reset delay
NOC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC1
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NOC2
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
UC1 Threshold setting
UC1 Definite time setting
UC2 Threshold setting
UC2 Definite time setting
Thermal overload setting
Pre Current value
Thermal Time Constant
Thermal alarm setting
Broken Conductor Threshold setting
Broken Conductor Definite time setting
CBF Threshold setting
CBF Threshold setting
Back trip Definite time setting
Re-trip Definite time setting
Sensitivity of 2f
Threshold of fundamental current
OC1 Threshold setting in CLP mode
EF1 Threshold setting in CLP mode
⎯ 239 ⎯
World wide
110D
400D
420D
0.05 / 0.010
-0.05 / 0.010
1.00
-1.00
1.000
-1.000
0.0
-0.0
1.000
-1.000
1.00
-1.00
0.05 / 0.010
-0.05 / 0.010
1.00
-1.00
1.000
-1.000
0.0
-0.0
1.000
-1.000
0.05 / 0.010
-0.05 / 0.010
1.00
-1.00
0.05 / 0.010
-0.05 / 0.010
1.00
-1.00
0.000
-0.000
0.00
-0.00
0.000
-0.000
0.000
-0.000
0.00
-0.00
0.000
-0.000
0.00
-0.00
0.000
-0.000
0.000
-0.000
0.00
-0.00
-2.0 / 0.40
-1.00
-1.000
-0.0
-1.000
-1.0 / 0.20
-1.00
-1.000
-0.0
-1.000
-0.000
-0.00
-0.000
-0.000
-0.00
-0.000
-0.00
-0.000
-0.000
-0.00
-1.0 / 0.20
-1.00
-2.0 / 0.40
-1.00
-5.0 / 1.00
-0.0 / 0.00
-10.0
-80
-0.20
-1.00
-2.5 / 0.50
2.5 / 0.50
0.50
0.40
-15
-0.5 / 0.10
-10.0 / 2.00
-25.0 / 5.00
-100.0 / 20.00
-200.0 / 40.00
-10.0 / 2.00
-25.0 / 5.00
-100.0 / 20.00
-200.0 / 40.00
User
setting
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
№
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
Setting Device Name
ARC
SE1
SE2
SE3
SE4
NC1
NC2
BCD
TCLE
TCLR
ICLDO
TCLDO
ARCEN
ARC-NUM
OC1-INIT
OC1-TP1
OC1-TP2
OC1-TP3
OC1-TP4
OC1-TP5
OC1-TP6
OC2-INIT
OC2-TP1
OC2-TP2
OC2-TP3
OC2-TP4
OC2-TP5
OC2-TP6
OC3-INIT
OC3-TP1
OC3-TP2
OC3-TP3
OC3-TP4
OC3-TP5
OC3-TP6
OC4-INIT
OC4-TP1
OC4-TP2
OC4-TP3
OC4-TP4
OC4-TP5
OC4-TP6
COORD-OC
EF1-INIT
EF1-TP1
EF1-TP2
EF1-TP3
EF1-TP4
EF1-TP5
EF1-TP6
EF2-INIT
EF2-TP1
EF2-TP2
EF2-TP3
EF2-TP4
EF2-TP5
EF2-TP6
EF3-INIT
EF3-TP1
EF3-TP2
EF3-TP3
EF3-TP4
EF3-TP5
EF3-TP6
EF4-INIT
EF4-TP1
EF4-TP2
EF4-TP3
EF4-TP4
EF4-TP5
EF4-TP6
Range
5A rating
1A rating
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.10 - 1.00
0 - 10000
0 - 10000
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
0.00 - 100.00
Off - On
S1 - S2 - S3 - S4 - S5
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - On
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Units
A
A
A
A
A
A
－
s
s
A
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
Contents
SEF1 Threshold setting in CLP mode
NOC1 Threshold setting in CLP mode
NOC2 Threshold setting in CLP mode
Broken Conductor Threshold setting in CLP
mode
Cold load enable timer
Cold load reset timer
Cold load drop-out threshold setting
Cold load drop-out timer
Autoreclosing Enable.
Reclosing shot max. number
Autoreclosing initiation by OC1 enable
OC relay for Co-ordination Enable
Autoreclosing initiation by EF1 enable
⎯ 240 ⎯
World wide
110D
400D
420D
-0.10 / 0.020
-0.10 / 0.020
-0.10 / 0.020
-0.10 / 0.020
-4.0 / 0.80
-2.0 / 0.40
-0.40
-100
-100
-2.5 / 0.50
-0.00
On
S1
-NA
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-NA
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-NA
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-NA
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Set
-Off
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
NA
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
User
setting
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
№
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
Setting Device Name
ARC
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
BI7
COORD-EF
SE1-INIT
SE1-TP1
SE1-TP2
SE1-TP3
SE1-TP4
SE1-TP5
SE1-TP6
SE2-INIT
SE2-TP1
SE2-TP2
SE2-TP3
SE2-TP4
SE2-TP5
SE2-TP6
SE3-INIT
SE3-TP1
SE3-TP2
SE3-TP3
SE3-TP4
SE3-TP5
SE3-TP6
SE4-INIT
SE4-TP1
SE4-TP2
SE4-TP3
SE4-TP4
SE4-TP5
SE4-TP6
COORD-SE
EXT-INIT
TRDY
TD1
TR1
TD2
TR2
TD3
TR3
TD4
TR4
TD5
TR5
TW
TSUC
TRCOV
TARCP
TRSET
OC-CO
EF-CO
SE-CO
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
PUD
DOD
SNS
Range
5A rating
1A rating
Off - On
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
NA - On - Block
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - Inst - Set
Off - On
NA - On - Block
0.0 - 600.0
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 300.00
0.01 - 310.00
0.01 - 10.00
0.0 - 600.0
0.1 - 600.0
0.1 - 600.0
0.01 - 300.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
World wide
110D
400D
420D
Off
－ EF relay for Co-ordination Enable
NA
-NA
－ Autoreclosing initiation by SEF1 enable
Set
-Set
－ SEF1 trip mode of 1st trip
－ SEF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
－ SEF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
－ SEF1 trip mode of 4th trip
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
NA
-NA
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
NA
-NA
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
NA
-NA
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Set
-Set
Off
-Off
－ SEF relay for Co-ordination Enable
NA
－ Autoreclosing initiation by External Trip Command enable
s Reclaim timer
60.0
s 1st shot Dead timer of Stage1
10.00
s 1st shot Reset timer of Stage1
310.00
s 2nd shot Dead timer of Stage1
10.00
s 2nd shot Reset timer of Stage1
310.00
s 3rd shot Dead timer of Stage1
10.00
s 3rd shot Reset timer of Stage1
310.00
s 4th shot Dead timer of Stage1
10.00
s 4th shot Reset timer of Stage1
310.00
s 5th shot Dead timer of Stage1
10.00
s 5th shot Reset timer of Stage1
310.00
s Out put pulse timer
2.00
s Autoreclosing Pause Time after manually close
3.0
s Autoreclosing Recovery time after Final Trip
10.0
s Autoreclosing Pause Time after manually close
10.0
s ARC reset time in CB closing mode.
3.00
A For Co-ordination
-5.0 / 1.00
A ditto
1.5 / 0.30
A ditto
0.05 / 0.010
-0.05 / 0.010
s Binary Input Pick-up delay
0.00
s Binary Input Drop-off delay
0.00
－ Binary Input Sense
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
0.00
0.00
Norm
Units
Contents
⎯ 241 ⎯
User
setting
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
№
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
Setting Device Name
BI8
PUD
DOD
SNS
LED1
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
LED2
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
LED3
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
LED4
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
LED5
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
LED6
Logic
Reset
In #1
In #2
In #3
In #4
IND1
Reset
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
IND2
Reset
BIT1
BIT2
BIT3
BIT4
BIT5
BIT6
BIT7
BIT8
Plant name
Description
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
IEC(注)
SYADJ
IP1-1
IP1-2
IP1-3
IP1-4
Range
5A rating
1A rating
0.00 - 300.00
0.00 - 300.00
Norm - Inv
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
OR - AND
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Inst - Latch
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
0 - 3071
Specified by user
ditto
Specified by user
Specified by user
Specified by user
Specified by user
0 - 254
-9999 - 9999
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
Units
Contents
s
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
ms
Binary Input Pick-up delay
Binary Input Drop-off delay
Binary Input Sense
LED1 Logic Gate Type
LED1 Reset operation
LED1 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED2 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED3 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED4 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED5 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
LED6 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
Virtual LED1 Reset operation
Virtual LED1 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Virtual LED2 Reset operation
Virtual LED2 Functions
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
Plant name
Memorandum for user
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text
Station address for IEC103
Time sync. Compensation
－ CH1 IP address
－
－
－
⎯ 242 ⎯
World wide
110D
400D
420D
0.00
0.00
Norm
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
OR
Inst
0
0
0
0
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Inst
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
no-name
no-data
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
2
0
192
168
19
172
User
setting
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
№
Setting Device Name
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
SM1-1
SM1-2
SM1-3
SM1-4
GW1-1
GW1-2
GW1-3
GW1-4
IP2-1
IP2-2
IP2-3
IP2-4
SM2-1
SM2-2
SM2-3
SM2-4
GW2-1
GW2-2
GW2-3
GW2-4
SI1-1
SI1-2
SI1-3
SI1-4
SI2-1
SI2-2
SI2-3
SI2-4
SI3-1
SI3-2
SI3-3
SI3-4
SI4-1
SI4-2
SI4-3
SI4-4
SMODE
DEADT
GOINT
PG1-1
PG1-2
PG1-3
PG1-4
PG2-1
PG2-2
PG2-3
PG2-4
232C
IECBR
IECBLK
850BLK
850AUT
TSTMOD
GSECHK
PINGCHK
BITRN
Time
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
TRIP
OC
EF
SEF
NOC
Range
1A rating
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0- 1
1 - 120
1 - 60
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
0 - 254
9.6 - 19.2 - 57.6
9.6 - 19.2
Normal - Blocked
Normal - Blocked
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
0 - 128
0.1 - 5.0
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.1 - 250.0
0.02 - 50.00
0.01 - 1.00
0.002 - 0.200
0.5 - 10.0
0.10 - 2.00
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Units
Contents
5A rating
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
min
s
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
s
A
A
A
A
－
－
－
－
－
CH1 Subnet mask
CH1 Gateway
IP Address of CH#2
Subnet Mask of CH#2
Gateway Address of CH#2
SNTP Server1 Address
TCP KeepAlive Time
Ping check addrs port#1
Ping check addrs port#2
RS-232C baud rate
IEC103 baud rate
Monitor direction blocked
IEC61850 Block
IEC61850 Authorize
IEC61850 Test mode
GOOSE receive check
Ping check
Number of bi-trigger (on/off) events
Disturbance record
Realy element for disturbance record initiation
ditto
ditto
ditto
Disturbance record trigger use or not
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
⎯ 243 ⎯
World wide
110D
400D
420D
255
255
255
0
192
168
19
1
192
168
19
173
255
255
255
0
192
168
19
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
120
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9.6
19.2
Normal
Normal
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
2.0
-10.0 / 2.00
3.0 / 0.60
1.00 / 0.200
-1.00 / 0.200
-2.0 / 0.40
On
-On
On
On
-On
-On
User
setting
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
№
Setting Device Name
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
TCSPEN
CBSMEN
TCAEN
ΣIyAEN
OPTAEN
TCALM
ΣIyALM
YVALUE
OPTALM
Display
Time sync
GMT
GMTm
Range
5A rating
1A rating
Off - On - Opt-On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
Off - On
1 - 10000
10 - 10000
1.0 - 2.0
100 - 5000
Pri - Sec - Pri-A
Of - BI - IRI - IEC - SN
-12 - +12
-59 - +59
Units
－
－
－
－
－
－
E6
－
ms
－
－
hrs
min
Contents
Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
CB condition super visor enable
Trip CounterAlarm Enable
ΣI^y Alarm Enable
Operate Time Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm Threshold
ΣI^y Alarm
Y value
Operate Time Alarm Threshold
Metering
Time sync.
Time
Time
⎯ 244 ⎯
World wide
110D
400D
420D
Off
Off
Off
-Off
-Off
10000
-10000
-2.0
-1000
Pri
Of
0
0
User
setting
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
5. PLC default setting
Output
№
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Delay Time / Flip Flop
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
OC1_BLOCK
OC2_BLOCK
OC3_BLOCK
OC4_BLOCK
EF1_BLOCK
EF2_BLOCK
EF3_BLOCK
EF4_BLOCK
EF1_PERMIT
EF2_PERMIT
EF3_PERMIT
EF4_PERMIT
SEF1_BLOCK
SEF2_BLOCK
SEF3_BLOCK
SEF4_BLOCK
NOC1_BLOCK
NOC2_BLOCK
UC1_BLOCK
UC2_BLOCK
CBF_BLOCK
THM_BLOCK
THMA_BLOCK
BCD_BLOCK
DFRQ1_BLOCK
DFRQ2_BLOCK
DFRQ3_BLOCK
DFRQ4_BLOCK
ARC_BLOCK
ARC_READY
ARC_INIT
MANUAL_CLOSE
ARC_NO_ACT
X
X
[771]BI4_COMMAND
[770]BI3_COMMAND
⎯ 245 ⎯
X
X
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
EXT_TRIP-A
EXT_TRIP-B
EXT_TRIP-C
EXT_TRIP
TC_FAIL
CB_N/O_CONT
CB_N/C_CONT
X
X
[769]BI2_COMMAND
[1]CONSTANT_1
X
X
IND.RESET
X
[768]BI1_COMMAND
X
ARC-S1_COND
ARC-S2_COND
ARC-S3_COND
ARC-S4_COND
ARC-S5_COND
X
X
X
X
X
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
[412]VCHK
X
X
X
X
X
CBF_INIT-A
CBF_INIT-B
CBF_INIT-C
CBF_INIT
TP_COUNT-A
TP_COUNT-B
TP_COUNT-C
TP_COUNT
X
[371]GEN.TRIP
X
X
[371]GEN.TRIP
X
SGM_IY-A
SGM_IY-B
SGM_IY-C
X
X
X
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
X
X
X
OT_ALARM-A
OT_ALARM-B
OT_ALARM-C
X
X
X
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
[371]GEN.TRIP
X
X
X
⎯ 246 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Signal
Up
--
OC1_INST_TP
OC2_INST_TP
OC3_INST_TP
OC4_INST_TP
EF1_INST_TP
EF2_INST_TP
EF3_INST_TP
EF4_INST_TP
SEF1_INST_TP
SEF2_INST_TP
SEF3_INST_TP
SEF4_INST_TP
⎯ 247 ⎯
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
⎯ 248 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
⎯ 249 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
⎯ 250 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Up
Signal
--
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
⎯ 251 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
⎯ 252 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
⎯ 253 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
⎯ 254 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
⎯ 255 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
⎯ 256 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
⎯ 257 ⎯
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Signal
Up
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 DISP.ALARM1
2561 DISP.ALARM2
2562 DISP.ALARM3
2563 DISP.ALARM4
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576 SYNC_CLOCK
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
⎯ 258 ⎯
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
ALARM_LED_SET
F.RECORD1
F.RECORD2
F.RECORD3
F.RECORD4
D.RECORD1
D.RECORD2
D.RECORD3
D.RECORD4
SET.GROUP1
SET.GROUP2
SET.GROUP3
SET.GROUP4
SET.GROUP5
SET.GROUP6
SET.GROUP7
SET.GROUP8
CON_TPMD1
CON_TPMD2
CON_TPMD3
CON_TPMD4
CON_TPMD5
⎯ 259 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
CON_TPMD6
CON_TPMD7
CON_TPMD8
ARC_COM_RECV
PROT_COM_RECV
TPLED_RST_RCV
⎯ 260 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
⎯ 261 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
--
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
TEMP001
TEMP002
TEMP003
TEMP004
TEMP005
TEMP006
TEMP007
TEMP008
TEMP009
TEMP010
TEMP011
TEMP012
TEMP013
TEMP014
TEMP015
TEMP016
TEMP017
TEMP018
TEMP019
TEMP020
TEMP021
TEMP022
TEMP023
TEMP024
TEMP025
TEMP026
TEMP027
TEMP028
TEMP029
TEMP030
TEMP031
TEMP032
TEMP033
TEMP034
TEMP035
TEMP036
TEMP037
TEMP038
TEMP039
TEMP040
TEMP041
TEMP042
TEMP043
TEMP044
TEMP045
TEMP046
TEMP047
TEMP048
TEMP049
TEMP050
TEMP051
TEMP052
TEMP053
TEMP054
TEMP055
TEMP056
TEMP057
TEMP058
TEMP059
TEMP060
TEMP061
TEMP062
TEMP063
TEMP064
TEMP065
TEMP066
TEMP067
TEMP068
TEMP069
TEMP070
⎯ 262 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
TEMP071
TEMP072
TEMP073
TEMP074
TEMP075
TEMP076
TEMP077
TEMP078
TEMP079
TEMP080
TEMP081
TEMP082
TEMP083
TEMP084
TEMP085
TEMP086
TEMP087
TEMP088
TEMP089
TEMP090
TEMP091
TEMP092
TEMP093
TEMP094
TEMP095
TEMP096
TEMP097
TEMP098
TEMP099
TEMP100
TEMP101
TEMP102
TEMP103
TEMP104
TEMP105
TEMP106
TEMP107
TEMP108
TEMP109
TEMP110
TEMP111
TEMP112
TEMP113
TEMP114
TEMP115
TEMP116
TEMP117
TEMP118
TEMP119
TEMP120
TEMP121
TEMP122
TEMP123
TEMP124
TEMP125
TEMP126
TEMP127
TEMP128
TEMP129
TEMP130
TEMP131
TEMP132
TEMP133
TEMP134
TEMP135
TEMP136
TEMP137
TEMP138
TEMP139
TEMP140
TEMP141
TEMP142
TEMP143
TEMP144
TEMP145
⎯ 263 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Back
Release
Norm
Up
Signal
--
TEMP146
TEMP147
TEMP148
TEMP149
TEMP150
TEMP151
TEMP152
TEMP153
TEMP154
TEMP155
TEMP156
TEMP157
TEMP158
TEMP159
TEMP160
TEMP161
TEMP162
TEMP163
TEMP164
TEMP165
TEMP166
TEMP167
TEMP168
TEMP169
TEMP170
TEMP171
TEMP172
TEMP173
TEMP174
TEMP175
TEMP176
TEMP177
TEMP178
TEMP179
TEMP180
TEMP181
TEMP182
TEMP183
TEMP184
TEMP185
TEMP186
TEMP187
TEMP188
TEMP189
TEMP190
TEMP191
TEMP192
TEMP193
TEMP194
TEMP195
TEMP196
TEMP197
TEMP198
TEMP199
TEMP200
TEMP201
TEMP202
TEMP203
TEMP204
TEMP205
TEMP206
TEMP207
TEMP208
TEMP209
TEMP210
TEMP211
TEMP212
TEMP213
TEMP214
TEMP215
TEMP216
TEMP217
TEMP218
TEMP219
TEMP220
⎯ 264 ⎯
Timer
Off
On One
Delay Delay Shot
Time Value
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Output
№
Signal
Timing
Cycle
30
90
User
Logic expression
Turn
Flip Flop
Release
Back
Norm
Signal
Up
--
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
⎯ 265 ⎯
Timer
Off On One
Time Value
Delay Delay Shot
None
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
6. Disturbance record setting
Disturbance record default setting
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Setting Device Name
Signal No.
Signal Name
Range
SIG1
0 - 3071
Signal name1
SIG2
0 - 3071
Signal name2
SIG3
0 - 3071
Signal name3
SIG4
0 - 3071
Signal name4
SIG5
0 - 3071
Signal name5
SIG6
0 - 3071
Signal name6
SIG7
0 - 3071
Signal name7
SIG8
0 - 3071
Signal name8
SIG9
0 - 3071
Signal name9
SIG10
0 - 3071
Signal name10
SIG11
0 - 3071
Signal name11
SIG12
0 - 3071
Signal name12
SIG13
0 - 3071
Signal name13
SIG14
0 - 3071
Signal name14
SIG15
0 - 3071
Signal name15
SIG16
0 - 3071
Signal name16
SIG17
0 - 3071
Signal name17
SIG18
0 - 3071
Signal name18
SIG19
0 - 3071
Signal name19
SIG20
0 - 3071
Signal name20
SIG21
0 - 3071
Signal name21
SIG22
0 - 3071
Signal name22
SIG23
0 - 3071
Signal name23
SIG24
0 - 3071
Signal name24
SIG25
0 - 3071
Signal name25
SIG26
0 - 3071
Signal name26
SIG27
0 - 3071
Signal name27
SIG28
0 - 3071
Signal name28
SIG29
0 - 3071
Signal name29
SIG30
0 - 3071
Signal name30
SIG31
0 - 3071
Signal name31
SIG32
0 - 3071
Signal name32
User setting of Virtual LED
1
2
IND1
[
IND2
Contents
Disturbance record signal
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
ditto
3
Model
Signal No.
Signal Name
110D
400D
420D
x
51
OC1-A
-x
52
OC1-B
-x
53
OC1-C
-x
101
OC1 TRIP
-x
63
EF1
x
117
EF1 TRIP
x
x
67
SEF1
-x
x
121
SEF1-S1 TRIP
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-x
371
GEN.TRIP
x
221
ARC READY T
x
1604
ARC BLOCK
x
223
ARC SHOT
0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
-0
NA
--
4
5
6
7
8
]
[
]
⎯ 266 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit
4. Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
⎯ 267 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
1.
Relay identification
Type
Serial number
Model
System frequency
Station
Date
Circuit
Engineer
Protection scheme
Witness
Active settings group number
2.
Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3.
Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit
3.3 AC input circuit
⎯ 268 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
4.
Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test
Element
Current setting
Measured current
OC1-A
OC2-A
OC3-A
OC4-A
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4
UC1-A
UC2-A
THM-A
THM-T
NOC1
NOC2
BCD
CBF-A
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)
Element
Curve setting
Multiplier setting
OC1-A
OC2-A
EF1
EF2
SEF1
SEF2
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
⎯ 269 ⎯
Measured time
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
5.
Protection scheme test
6.
Metering and recording check
7.
Conjunctive test
Scheme
Results
On load check
Tripping circuit
⎯ 270 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix J
Return Repair Form
⎯ 271 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
RETURN / REPAIR FORM
Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRD110 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex
1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type:
GRD110
(Example: Type:
Model:
GRD110
Model:
400D
)
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1.
Reason for returning the relay
mal-function
does not operate
increased error
investigation
others
2.
Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on floppy disk, or fill in the
attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
⎯ 272 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year
/
:
Time
/
:
.
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002
15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Ia:
Ib :
Ic:
IE :
ISE:
I1 :
I2 :
I2 / I1 :
Fault values
Ia:
Ib :
Ic:
IE :
ISE:
I1 :
I2 :
I2 / I1 :
THM:
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
%
⎯ 273 ⎯
/
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.
What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4.
Describe the details of the incident:
5.
Date incident occurred
Day/Month/Year:
/
/
(Example: 10/July/2002)
6.
Give any comments about the GRD110, including the documents:
⎯ 274 ⎯
/
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
⎯ 275 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 276 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix K
Technical Data
⎯ 277 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC current In:
Frequency:
DC auxiliary supply:
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply:
DC supply interruption:
Binary input circuit DC voltage:
1A or 5A
50Hz or 60Hz
110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)
220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc)
48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)
maximum 12%
maximum 50ms at 110V
110/125Vdc
220/250Vdc
48/54/60Vdc
24/30Vdc
Overload Ratings
AC current inputs:
Burden
AC phase current inputs:
AC earth current inputs:
AC sensitive earth inputs:
DC power supply:
Binary input circuit:
Current Transformer Requirements
Phase Inputs
Standard Earth Inputs:
Sensitive Earth Inputs:
Phase Overcurrent Protection (OC1 – OC4)
OC 1st , OC 2nd Overcurrent threshold:
Delay type:
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Type:
Reset Definite Delay:
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:
OC 3rd, 4th Overcurrent thresholds:
DTL delay:
OC elements PU time (at 200% of setting):
DO time (at 200% of setting)
3 times rated current continuous
100 times rated current for 1 second
≤ 0.1VA (1A rating)
≤ 10W (quiescent)
≤ 15W (maximum)
≤ 0.5W per input at 110Vdc
Typically 5P20 with rated burden according to load, (refer to
section 2.12 for detailed instructions).
Core balance CT or residual connection of phase CTs.
Core balance CT.
OFF, 0.02 – 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI, IEEE VI,
IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI, or Configurable IDMTL
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Definite Time or Dependent Time.
0.0 - 300.0s in 0.1s steps
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
OFF, 0.02 - 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
OFF, 0.1 -250.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
OC1 – OC4: less than 45ms, OCHS: less than 40ms
OC1 – OC4: less than 50ms, OCHS: less than 30ms
Note: PU/DO time is including PU/DO time (around 10ms) of binary output contact.
⎯ 278 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Earth Fault Protection
E/F 1st Overcurrent threshold:
E/F 2nd Overcurrent threshold:
Delay type:
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS:
DTL delay:
Reset Type:
Reset Definite. Delay:
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS:
E/F 3rd, 4th thresholds:
DTL delay:
EF elements PU time (at 200% of setting):
DO time (at 200% of setting):
SEF 1st, 2nd Overcurrent threshold:
Delay Type:
Stage 1 TMS:
Stage 1 DTL delay:
Stage 1 Reset Type:
Stage 1 Reset Def. Delay:
Stage 1 RTMS:
Stage 2 DTL delay:
SEF 3rd, 4th thresholds (GRD110-110A only):
DTL delay:
SEF element PU time (at 200% of setting):
DO time (at 200% of setting):
Undercurrent 1st, 2nd threshold:
DTL Delay:
IAOL = k.IFLC (Thermal setting):
Time constant (τ):
Thermal alarm:
Negative Phase Sequence Protection
NPS 1st, 2nd threshold:
DTL delay:
CBF Protection
CBF threshold:
CBF stage 1 (Backup trip) DTL:
CBF stage 2 (Re-trip) DTL:
CBF element PU time and DO time:
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.0 - 300.0s in 0.01s steps
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
EF1 – EF4: less than 45ms, EFHS: less than 40ms
EF1 – EF4: less than 50ms, EFHS: less than 30ms
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.0 - 300.0s in 0.01s steps
0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
SEF1 – SEF4: less than 80ms, SEFHS: less than 70ms
SEF1 – SEF4: less than 90ms, SEFHS: less than 30ms
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.5 - 500.0mins in 0.1mins steps
OFF, 50% to 99% in 1% steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
PU time: less than 20ms
DO time: less than 20ms
⎯ 279 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Broken conductor threshold (I2/I1):
DTL delay:
OFF, 0.10 - 1.00 in 0.01 steps
0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Second harmonic ratio setting (I2f / I1f):
Overcurrent thresholds:
10 - 50%
in 1% steps
0.10 - 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.5 - 25.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Autoreclose
ARC Reclaim Time
0.0 - 600.0s in 0.1s steps
Close Pulse Width
0.01 - 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Lock-out Recovery Time
OFF, 0.1 - 600.0s in 0.1s steps
Sequences
1 - 5 Shots to Lock-out, each trip programmable for inst or Delayed
operation
Dead Times(programmable for each shot)
Accuracy
Overcurrent Pick-ups:
Overcurrent PU/DO ratio:
Undercurrent Pick-up:
Undercurrent PU/DO ratio:
Inverse Time Delays:
Definite Time Delays:
Transient Overreach for instantaneous
elements:
Frequency variation:
0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
100% of setting ± 5%
≥100%, CBF element: ≥125%
100% of setting ± 5%
≤100%
± 5% or 30ms (1.5 ≤ I/Is ≤ 30)
± 1% or 10ms
<−5% for X/R = 100.
<± 5% (± 5% variation of rated frequency)
Front Communication port - local PC (RS232)
Connection:
Point to point
Cable type:
Multi-core (straight)
Cable length:
15m (max.)
Connector:
RS232C 9-way D-subminiature connector female
Rear Communication port - remote PC
RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Connection
Cable type
Cable length
Connection
Isolation
Transmission rate
Fibre optic I/F for IEC60870-5-103:
Cable type
Connector
Transmission rate
Ethernet LAN I/F for IEC61850 or RSM100:
Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Twisted pair cable with shield
1200m (max.)
Screw terminals
1kVac for 1 min.
9.6, 19.2kbps
Graded-index multi-mode 50/125 or 62.5/125μm fibre
ST
9.6, 19.2kbps
100BASE-TX: RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX: SC connector
Time synchronization port
IRIG Time Code
Input impedance
Input voltage range
Connection
IRIG-B122
4k-ohm
4Vp-p to 10Vp-p
Screw type
⎯ 280 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Binary Inputs
Number:
PU voltage:
Response time:
Binary Outputs
Number
PU time:
Contact ratings:
Durability:
DC Supply Monitoring
Threshold of DC power fail:
Mechanical design
Weight
Case color
Installation
8
Typical 74Vdc(min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min. 125Vdc) for 220Vdc/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54V/60Vdc rating
Typical 15Vdc(min. 13Vdc) for 24/30Vdc rating
Less than 8ms
8
Less than 10ms
Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 20A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≥5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms) or 0.2A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Loaded contact: 10000 operations
Unloaded contact: 100000 operations
Typical 74Vdc(min.70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min.125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48V/54/60dc rating
Typical 15Vdc(min. 13Vdc) for 24/30Vdc rating
4.5 kg
Munsell No. 10YR8/1
Flush mounting
⎯ 281 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test
Standards
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature
IEC60068-2-1/2
Humidity
Details
Operating range: -10°C to +55°C.
Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.
IEC60068-2-78
56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.
IP51 (Rear: IP20)
Enclosure Protection
IEC60529
Mechanical Environment
Vibration
IEC60255-21-1
Shock and Bump
Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Class 1
IEC60255-21-2
Seismic
IEC60255-21-3
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand
IEC60255-5
High Voltage Impulse
2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak),
1.2/50μs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all
terminals and earth.
IEC60255-5
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency
IEC60255-22-1 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-12 / EN61000-4-12
Disturbance / Damped
Oscillatory Wave
Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2
Radiated RF
IEC60255-22-3 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
Fast Transient
IEC60255-22-4, IEC61000-4-4 /
Disturbance
EN61000-4-4
Surge Immunity
IEC60255-22-5,
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5
Conducted RF
Electromagnetic
Disturbance
Power Frequency
Disturbance
IEC60255-22-6 Class 3,
IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6
Conducted and
Radiated Emissions
IEC60255-25,
EN55022 Class A,
IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4
IEC60255-22-7, IEC61000-4-16
/ EN61000-4-16
European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC
73/23/EEC
1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode.
1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to
1GHz and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80,
160, 450, 900 and 1890MHz.
4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
1.2/50μs surge in common/differential modes:
HV ports: 4kV/2kV (peak)
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV/0.5kV (peak)
10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted emissions:
0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 30m):
30 to 230MHz: <30dB
230 to 1000MHz: <37dB
Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to EN
61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to EN 50178 and EN
60255-5.
⎯ 282 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix L
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
⎯ 283 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with
: Measuring element output signal
Marked with
: Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment
Marked with [
]
Marked with "
"
Unmarked
:
Scheme switch
:
Scheme switch position
: Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A
B
&
Output
A
1
B
C
1
1
Other cases
Output
1
0
A
1
B
C
1
0
Other cases
Output
1
0
A
1
B
C
0
0
Other cases
Output
1
0
A
0
B
C
0
0
Other cases
Output
0
1
A
0
B
C
0
1
Other cases
Output
0
1
A
0
B
C
1
1
Other cases
Output
0
1
A
B
0
1
1
0
Other cases
Output
1
1
0
C
A
B
&
Output
C
A
B
&
Output
C
OR gates
A
B
≥1
Output
C
A
B
≥1
Output
C
A
B
≥1
Output
XOR gatesC
A
=1
Output
B
⎯ 284 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Signal inversion
A
A
0
1
Output
1
Output
1
0
Timer
t
Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
0
XXX:
Set time
XXX
0
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
t
XXX:
Set time
XXX
t
Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting
0
XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0
Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting
t
XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A
Output
Output
XXX - YYY
Flip-flop
S
0
1
0
1
S
F/F
Output
R
R
0
0
1
1
Output
No change
1
0
0
Scheme switch
A
Output
ON
+
Output
ON
⎯ 285 ⎯
A
Switch
1
ON
Other cases
Switch
ON
OFF
Output
1
0
Output
1
0
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 286 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix M
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
⎯ 287 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed
easily as follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “¥IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and
operate it according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start]→[Programs]→[IEC103 Configurator]→[IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking
[Help]→[Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.
Requirements for IEC60870-5-103 master station
Polling cycle: 150ms or more
Timeout time (time till re-sending the request frame to relay): 100ms or more
IEC103 master
GR relay
Data request
Polling cycle:
150ms or more
Response frame
Data request
Response frame
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
⎯ 288 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”.
(For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0839.)
-
Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission
condition(Signal number), COT
-
Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal number),
COT, Type of measurand quantities
-
Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)
-
Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of
measurand quantities
-
Common setting
• Transmission cycle of Measurand frame
• FUN of System function
• Test mode, etc.
CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC
supply of the relay and turn on again.
3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values can be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported
commands with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing
in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test
mode’. This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages
normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
⎯ 289 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
3.2 List of Information
The followings are the default settings.
IEC103 Configurator Default setting
INF
Description
Contents
GI
Type
COT
FUN
ID
DPI
Signal No. OFF
ON
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0
End of General Interrogation
Transmission completion of GI items.
--
8
10
255
--
--
--
0
Time Synchronization
Time Synchronization ACK.
--
6
8
255
--
--
--
2
Reset FCB
Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK
--
5
3
160
--
--
--
3
Reset CU
Reset CU ACK
--
5
4
160
--
--
--
4
Start/Restart
Relay start/restart
--
5
5
160
--
--
--
5
Pow er On
Relay pow er on.
1411
1
2
Not supported
Status Indications
16 Auto-recloser active
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set
active, if impossible, inactive.
17 Teleprotection active
If protection using telecommunication is available, this
item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.
18 Protection active
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If
not, set to inactive.
GI
1
1, 7, 12
160
1413
1
2
19 LED reset
Reset of latched LEDs
--
1
1, 7, 11, 12
160
1409
--
2
20 Monitor direction blocked
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control
system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.
GI
1
11
160
1241
1
2
21 Test mode
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to
control system. IECTST "ON" setting.
GI
1
11
160
1242
1
2
22 Local parameter Setting
When a setting change has done at the local, the
event is sent to control system.
23 Characteristic1
Setting group 1 active
GI
1
1, 7, 11, 12
160
1243
1
2
24 Characteristic2
GI
1
1, 7, 11, 12
160
1244
1
2
25 Characteristic3
GI
1
1, 7, 11, 12
160
1245
1
2
26 Characteristic4
GI
1
1, 7, 11, 12
160
1246
1
2
27 Auxiliary input1
Binary input 1
No set
28 Auxiliary input2
Binary input 2
No set
29 Auxiliary input3
Binary input 3
No set
30 Auxiliary input4
Binary input 4
No set
1266
1
2
1270
1
2
GI
1
1, 7, 11, 12
160
Not supported
Not supported
Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I
Zero sequence current supervision
33 Measurand supervision V
Zero sequence voltage supervision
GI
35 Phase sequence supervision
Negative sequence voltage supevision
36 Trip circuit supervision
Output circuit supervision
1
1, 7
160
Not supported
Not supported
GI
1
1, 7
37 I>>backup operation
160
Not supported
38 VT fuse failure
VT failure
Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed
CF(Communication system Fail) supervision
Not supported
46 Group w arning
Only alarming
GI
1
1, 7
160
1258
1
2
47 Group alarm
Trip blocking and alarming
GI
1
1, 7
160
1252
1
2
48 Earth Fault L1
A phase earth fault
GI
1
1, 7
160
800
1
2
49 Earth Fault L2
B phase earth fault
GI
1
1, 7
160
801
1
2
50 Earth Fault L3
C phase earth fault
GI
1
1, 7
160
802
1
2
Earth Fault Indications
51 Earth Fault Fw d
Earth fault forw ard
Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev
Earth fault reverse
Not supported
⎯ 290 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
INF
Description
Contents
GI
Type
COT
FUN
ID
DPI
Signal NO. OFF
ON
Fault Indications
64
Start/pick-up L1
A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7
160
805
1
65
Start/pick-up L2
B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7
160
806
1
2
2
66
Start/pick-up L3
C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7
160
807
1
2
67
Start/pick-up N
Earth fault element pick-up
GI
2
1, 7
160
808
1
2
68
General trip
Any trip
--
2
1, 7
160
371
--
2
69
Trip L1
A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip
--
2
1, 7
160
372
--
2
70
Trip L2
B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip
--
2
1, 7
160
373
--
2
71
Trip L3
C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip
--
2
1, 7
160
374
--
2
72
Trip I>>(back-up)
Back up trip
No set
73
Fault location X In ohms
Fault location
Not supported
74
Fault forw ard/line
Forw ard fault
Not supported
75
Fault reverse/Busbar
Reverse fault
Not supported
76
Teleprotection Signal transmitted Carrier signal sending
Not supported
77
Teleprotection Signal received
Carrier signal receiving
Not supported
78
Zone1
Zone 1 trip
Not supported
79
Zone2
Zone 2 trip
Not supported
80
Zone3
Zone 3 trip
Not supported
81
Zone4
Zone 4 trip
Not supported
82
Zone5
Zone 5 trip
Not supported
83
Zone6
Zone 6 trip
84
General Start/Pick-up
Any elements pick-up
GI
2
1, 7
160
1279
1
2
85
Breaker Failure
CBF trip or CBF retrip
--
2
1, 7
160
818
--
2
86
Trip measuring system L1
Not supported
87
Not supported
88
Not supported
89
Trip measuring system E
90
Trip I>
Inverse time OC trip
--
2
1, 7
160
819
--
2
91
Trip I>>
Definite time OC trip
--
2
1, 7
160
820
--
2
92
Trip IN>
Inverse time earth fault OC trip
--
2
1, 7
160
821
--
2
93
Trip IN>>
Definite time earth fault OC trip
--
2
1, 7
160
822
--
2
CB close command output
--
1
1, 7
160
223
--
2
220
2
1
Not supported
Not supported
Autoreclose indications
128
CB 'ON' by Autoreclose
129
CB 'ON' by long-time
Autoreclose
130
Autoreclose Blocked
Not supported
Autoreclose block
GI
⎯ 291 ⎯
1
1, 7
160
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IEC103 configurator Default setting
INF
Description
Contents
GI
Type
ID
COT
FUN
Max. No.
Measurands(*3)
144
Measurand I
<meaurand I>
--
3
2, 7
160
1
145
Measurand I,V
Ib measurand <meaurand I>
--
3
2, 7
160
2
146
Measurand I,V,P,Q
Ib measurand <meaurand I>
--
3
2, 7
160
4
147
Measurand IN,VEN
Ie, Io measurand <meaurand I>
--
3
2, 7
160
2
148
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
P,Q,f
Ia, Ib, Ic measurand <meaurand II>
--
9
2, 7
160
9
Generic Function
240
Read Headings
Not supported
241
Read attributes of all entries of
a group
Not supported
243
Read directory of entry
Not supported
244
Real attribute of entry
Not supported
245
End of GGI
Not supported
249
Write entry w ith confirm
Not supported
250
Write entry w ith execute
Not supported
251
Write entry aborted
Not supported
Note (∗3): depends on relay model as follows:
Type ID=3.1
(INF=144)
IL2
0
Ib
Ib
Model
Model 110
Model 400
Model 420
Type ID=9
(INF=148)
IL1
0
Ia
Ia
Model
Model 110
Model 400
Model 420
Type ID=3.2
Type ID=3.3
Type ID=3.4
(INF=145)
(INF=146)
(INF=147)
IL2
VL1-VL2
IL2
VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q
IN
0
0
Ie
Ib
Ib
Ie
Ib
Ib
Ie
IL2
0
Ib
Ib
IL3
0
Ic
Ic
VL1
-
VL2
-
VL3
-
Above values are normalized by IECNF∗.
Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator
INF MEA
Tbl
Offset Data type
Limit
Coeff
Lower
Upper
144
Ib
1
80
long
0
4096
1.70667
145
Ib
1
80
long
0
4096
1.70667
146
Ib
1
80
long
0
4096
1.70667
147
Ie
1
152
long
0
4096
1.70667
Ia
1
72
long
0
4096
1.70667
Ib
1
80
long
0
4096
1.70667
Ic
1
88
long
0
4096
1.70667
148
⎯ 292 ⎯
3-phase P 3-phase Q
-
VEN
-
f
-
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
INF
Description
Contents
Control
Type ID
direction
COT
FUN
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
0
Initiation of general interrogation
--
7
9
255
0
Time synchronization
--
6
8
255
160
General commands
16
Auto-recloser on/off
ON/OFF
20
20
17
Teleprotection on/off
ON/OFF
20
20
160
18
Protection on/off
(*1)
ON/OFF
20
20
160
19
LED reset
Reset indication of latched LEDs.
ON
20
20
160
23
Activate characteristic 1
Setting Group 1
ON
20
20
160
24
Setting Group 2
ON
20
20
160
25
Setting Group 3
ON
20
20
160
26
Setting Group 4
ON
20
20
160
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240
groups
Not supported
241
Read values or attributes of all
entries of one group
Not supported
243
Read directory of a single entry
Not supported
244
Read values or attributes of a
single entry
Not supported
245
General Interrogation of generic
data
Not supported
248
Write entry
Not supported
249
Write entry w ith confirmation
Not supported
250
Write entry w ith execution
Not supported
(∗1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, "IN SERVICE LED" is off.
Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator
DCO
INF
Sig off
Sig on
16
2684
2684
17
2685
2685
18
2686
2686
19
0
2688
200
23
0
2640
1000
24
0
2641
1000
25
0
2642
1000
26
0
2643
1000
Rev
✓
✓
✓
Valid time
0
0
0
✓: signal reverse
⎯ 293 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Description
Contents
GRD110 supported
Basic application functions
Test mode
Yes
Blocking of monitor direction
Yes
Disturbance data
No
Generic services
No
Private data
Yes
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated value
times
Measurand
Current L1
Ia
Configurable
Current L2
Ib
Configurable
Current L3
Ic
Configurable
Voltage L1-E
Va
Not supported
Voltage L2-E
Vb
Not supported
Voltage L3-E
Vc
Not supported
Active pow er P
P
Not supported
Reactive pow er Q
Q
Not supported
Frequency f
f
Not supported
Voltage L1 - L2
Vab
Not supported
Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator
- Setting file’s remark:
IGRD110DA000
- Remote operation valid time [ms]:
4000
- Local operation valid time [ms]:
4000
- Measurand period [s]:
2
- Function type of System functions: 160
- Signal No. of Test mode:
1242
- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1279
⎯ 294 ⎯
Comment
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)
⎯ 295 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 296 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix N
IEC61850: MICS & PICS
⎯ 297 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
MICS: The GRD110 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the
following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
L ogical N od es
G R D 110
L : System L ogical N od es
LPH D
Yes
C om m on L ogical N ode
Yes
L LN 0
Yes
P: L ogical N odes for Protection function s
P D IF
P D IR
N odes
G R D 110
G G IO _G O O SE
Yes
G SAL
---
I: Logical N odes for Interfacin g and archiving
IA R C
IH M I
-----
---
IT C I
---
---
IT M I
---
P D IS
---
PD OP
---
AN CR
---
PD UP
---
AR CO
---
PFRC
---
AT C C
---
PH AR
Yes
AV C O
---
A : L ogical N odes for A utom atic con trol
P H IZ
---
P IO C
---
M D IF
---
PM RI
---
M H AI
---
P M SS
---
M H AN
---
P O PE
---
M M TR
---
P PA M
---
M M XN
---
PSCH
---
M M XU
Yes
PSDE
P T EF
-----
M SQ I
M STA
Yes
---
PTOC
Yes
P TO F
---
SA R C
---
P TO V
---
SIM G
---
P T RC
Yes
SIM L
---
PTTR
Yes
SP D C
---
PT UC
Yes
PT UV
---
X CBR
Yes
P U PF
---
X SW I
---
PT UF
---
PV OC
---
P V PH
P ZS U
-----
M : L ogical N od es for M etering and m easu rem ent
S : L ogical N od es for Sen so rs and m onitorin g
X : L ogical N odes for Sw itchgear
T: L ogical N od es for Instrum ent tran sform ers
TC TR
TV T R
-----
Y: L ogical N odes for Pow er tran sform ers
Y EFN
R : L ogical N od es for protection related fu nctions
---
RDRE
---
Y LT C
---
RADR
---
Y P SH
---
Y P TR
---
RBDR
---
RDRS
---
RBRF
Yes
Z: L ogical N odes for F urther p ow er system equ ip m ent
ZA X N
---
R D IR
---
ZB AT
---
R FLO
---
ZC AB
---
R PSB
---
ZC AP
---
R R EC
Yes
ZC O N
---
R SY N
---
ZG EN
---
C : L ogical N od es for C ontrol
ZG IL
---
C A LH
---
ZL IN
---
CCGR
---
ZM O T
---
C ILO
---
ZR E A
---
C PO W
---
ZR RC
---
C SW I
---
ZS A R
---
ZT C F
---
ZT C R
---
G : L ogical N od es for G en eric references
G A PC
---
G G IO
Yes
⎯ 298 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3
Common data classes
Status information
SPS
DPS
INS
ACT
ACT_ABC
ACD
ACD_ABC
SEC
BCR
Measured information
MV
CMV
SAV
WYE
WYE_ABCN
DEL
SEQ
HMV
HWYE
HDEL
Controllable status information
SPC
DPC
INC
BSC
ISC
Controllable analogue information
APC
Status settings
SPG
ING
Analogue settings
ASG
CURVE
Description information
DPL
LPL
CSD
GRD110
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
----Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
------Yes
Yes
Yes
--------Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
---
⎯ 299 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
LPHD class
Attribute Name
LNName
Data
PhyName
PhyHealth
OutOv
Proxy
InOv
NumPwrUp
WrmStr
WacTrg
PwrUp
PwrDn
PwrSupAlm
RsStat
Attr. Type Explanation
Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DPL
INS
SPS
SPS
SPS
INS
INS
INS
SPS
SPS
SPS
SPC
Physical device name plate
Physical device health
Output communications buffer overflow
Indicates if this LN is a proxy
Input communications buffer overflow
Number of Power ups
Number of Warm Starts
Number of watchdog device resets detected
Power Up detected
Power Down detected
External power supply alarm
Reset device statistics
Common Logical Node class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation
LNName
Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod
INC
Mode
Beh
INS
Behaviour
Health
INS
Health
NamPlt
LPL
Name plate
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc
SPS
Local operation
EEHealth
INS
External equipment health
EEName
DPL
External equipment name plate
OpCntRs
INC
Operation counter resetable
OpCnt
INS
Operation counter
OpTmh
INS
Operation time
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and ٛ pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
LNName
T M/O GRD110
T
M
M
O
M
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
T M/O GRD110
M
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
N
T M/O GRD110
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class
Loc
OpTmh
Controls
Diag
LEDRs
SPS
INS
Local operation for complete logical device
Operation time
SPC
SPC
Run Diagnostics
LED reset
T
⎯ 300 ⎯
M
O
O
Y
N
O
O
Y
Y
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
PHAR class
LNName
Data
T
OpCntRs
INC
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC
Settings
HarRst
ING
PhStr
ASG
PhStop
ASG
OpDlTmms
ING
RsDlTmms
ING
Resetable operation counter
M
O
N
Start
M
Y
Number of harmonic restrained
Start Value
Stop Value
Operate Delay Time
Reset Delay Time
O
O
O
O
O
N
Y
N
N
N
PTOC class
LNName
Data
T
OpCntRs
INC
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC
Op
ACT_ABC
TmASt
CSD
Settings
TmACrv
CURVE
StrVal
ASG
TmMult
ASG
MinOpTmms
ING
MaxOpTmms
ING
OpDITmms
ING
TypRsCrv
ING
RsDITmms
ING
DirMod
ING
M/O GRD110
Start
Operate
Active curve characteristic
T
Operating Curve Type
Start Value
Time Dial Multiplier
Minimum Operate Time
Maximum Operate Time
Operate Delay Time
Type of Reset Curve
Reset Delay Time
Directional Mode
PTRC class
LNName
Data
OpCntRs
INC
Status Information
Tr
ACT_ABC Trip
Op
ACT
Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions)
Str
ACD
Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes
Settings
TrMod
ING
Trip Mode
TrPlsTmms
ING
Trip Pulse Time
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
⎯ 301 ⎯
T
M/O GRD110
M
O
N
M
M
O
Y
Y
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
M/O GRD110
M
O
N
C
C
O
Y
N
N
O
O
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
PTTR class
LNName
Data
T
OpCntRs
INC
Measured Values
Amp
MV
Tmp
MV
TmpRl
MV
LodRsvAlm
MV
LodRsvTr
MV
AgeRat
MV
Status Information
Str
ACD
Op
ACT
AlmThm
ACT
TmTmpSt
CSD
TmASt
CSD
Settings
TmTmpCrv
CURVE
TmACrv
CURVE
TmpMax
ASG
StrVal
ASG
OpDlTmms
ING
MinOpTmms
ING
MaxOpTmms
ING
RsDlTmms
ING
ConsTms
ING
AlmVal
ASG
M
O
N
Current for thermal load model
Temperature for thermal load
Relation between temperature and max. temperature
Load reserve to alarm
Load reserve to trip
Ageing rate
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
N
O
M
O
O
O
Y
Y
Y
N
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Start
Operate
Thermal Alarm
T
Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement
Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model
Maximum allowed temperature
Start Value
Operate Delay Time
Reset Delay Time
Time constant of the thermal model
Alarm Value
PTUC class
LNName
Data
T
OpCntRs
INC
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC
Op
ACT_ABC
TmVSt
CSD
Settings
TmACrv
CURVE
StrVal
ASG
OpDlTmms
ING
TmMult
ASG
MinOpTmms
ING
MaxOpTmms
ING
TypRsCrv
ING
RsDlTmms
ING
DirMod
ING
M/O GRD110
Start
Operate
Operating Curve Type
Start Value
Operate Delay Time
Time Dial Multiplier
Type of Reset Curve
Reset Delay Time
Directional Mode
⎯ 302 ⎯
T
M/O GRD110
M
O
N
M
O
O
Y
Y
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
RBRF class
LNName
Data
T
OpCntRs
INC
Status Information
Str
ACD_ABC
OpEx
ACT_ABC
OpIn
ACT_ABC
Setting
Start, timer running
Breaker failure trip (“external trip”)
Operate, retrip (“internal trip”)
T
T
M/O GRD110
M
O
N
O
C
C
Y
Y
Y
Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both,
O
other)
FailTmms
ING
Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip
O
SPlTrTmms
ING
Single Pole Retrip Time Delay
O
TPTrTmms
ING
Three Pole Retrip Time Delay
O
DetValA
ASG
Current Detector Value
O
ReTrMod
ING
Retrip Mode
O
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.
FailMod
ING
RREC class
LNName
Data
T
OpCntRs
INC
Controls
BlkRec
SPC
ChkRec
SPC
Status Information
Auto
SPS
Op
ACT
AutoRecSt
INS
Setting
Rec1Tmms
ING
Rec2Tmms
ING
Rec3Tmms
ING
PlsTmms
ING
RclTmms
ING
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
M/O GRD110
M
O
N
Block Reclosing
Check Reclosing
O
O
N
N
O
M
M
N
Y
Y
O
O
O
O
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Automatic Operation (external switch status)
Operate (used here to provide close to XCBR)
Auto Reclosing Status
First Reclose Time
Second Reclose Time
Third Reclose Time
Close Pulse Time
Reclaim Time
⎯ 303 ⎯
T
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
GGIO class
LNName
Data
EEHealth
INS
EEName
DPL
Loc
SPS
OpCntRs
INC
Measured values
AnIn
MV
Controls
SPCSO
SPC
DPCSO
DPC
ISCSO
INC
Status Information
IntIn
INS
Alm
SPS
Ind1
SPS
Ind2
SPS
Ind3
SPS
Ind4
SPS
Ind5
SPS
Ind6
SPS
Ind7
SPS
Ind8
SPS
Ind9
SPS
Ind10
SPS
Ind64
SPS
T
M/O GRD110
External equipment health (external sensor)
Local operation
M
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
Analogue input
O
N
Single point controllable status output
Double point controllable status output
Integer status controllable status output
O
O
O
N
N
N
Integer status input
General single alarm
General indication (binary input)
:
:
:
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
O
Y
⎯ 304 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
GGIO_GOOSE class
LNName
Data
EEHealth
INS
EEName
DPL
Loc
SPS
OpCntRs
INC
Measured values
AnIn
MV
Controls
SPCSO
SPC
DPCSO
DPC
ISCSO
INC
Status Information
IntIn
INS
Alm
SPS
Ind1
SPS
Ind2
SPS
Ind3
SPS
Ind4
SPS
Ind5
SPS
Ind6
SPS
Ind7
SPS
Ind8
SPS
Ind9
SPS
Ind10
SPS
Ind11
SPS
Ind12
SPS
Ind13
SPS
Ind14
SPS
Ind15
SPS
Ind16
SPS
T
M/O GRD110
Local operation
M
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
Analogue input
O
N
Single point controllable status output
Double point controllable status output
Integer status controllable status output
O
O
O
N
N
N
Integer status input
General single alarm
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
⎯ 305 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
MMXU class
LNName
Data
T
EEHealth
Measured values
TotW
TotVAr
TotVA
TotPF
Hz
PPV
PhV
A
W
VAr
VA
PF
Z
INS
MV
Total Active Power (Total P)
MV
Total Reactive Power (Total Q)
MV
Total Apparent Power (Total S)
MV
Average Power factor (Total PF)
MV
Frequency
DEL
Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …)
WYE_ABC
Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …)
N
WYE_ABC
Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
N
WYE
Phase active power (P)
WYE
Phase reactive power (Q)
WYE
Phase apparent power (S)
WYE
Phase power factor
WYE
Phase Impedance
MSQI class
LNName
Data
EEHealth
INS
EEName
DPL
Measured values
SeqA
SEQ
Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current
SeqV
SEQ
Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage
DQ0Seq
SEQ
DQ0 Sequence
ImbA
WYE
Imbalance current
ImbNgA
MV
Imbalance negative sequence current
ImbNgV
MV
Imbalance negative sequence voltage
ImbPPV
DEL
Imbalance phase-phase voltage
ImbV
WYE
Imbalance voltage
ImbZroA
MV
Imbalance zero sequence current
ImbZroV
MV
Imbalance zero sequence voltage
MaxImbA
MV
Maximum imbalance current
MaxImbPPV
MV
Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage
MaxImbV
MV
Maximum imbalance voltage
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
⎯ 306 ⎯
T
M/O GRD110
M
O
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
N
O
N
O
Y
O
O
O
O
O
N
N
N
N
N
M/O GRD110
M
O
O
N
N
C
C
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
XCBR class
LNName
Data
T
EEHealth
INS
EEName
DPL
OpCnt
INS
Controls
Pos
DPC
BlkOpn
SPC
BlkCls
SPC
ChaMotEna
SPC
Metered Values
SumSwARs
BCR
Status Information
CBOpCap
INS
POWCap
INS
MaxOpCap
INS
M/O GRD110
Operation counter
M
O
O
M
N
N
Y
Switch position
Block opening
Block closing
Charger motor enabled
M
M
M
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable
O
N
Circuit breaker operating capability
Point On Wave switching capability
Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged
M
O
O
Y
N
N
SPS class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
TRUE | FALSE
q
Quality
ST qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
BOOLEAN
SV
TRUE | FALSE
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
configuration, description and extension
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
As defined in Table 13
⎯ 307 ⎯
M/O/C
GRD110
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
INS class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
status
stVal
INT32
ST dchg
q
Quality
ST qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
Substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
subVal
INT32
SV
subQ
Quality
SV
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.
ACT class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
status
general
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
phsA
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
phsB
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
phsC
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
neut
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
q
Quality
ST qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
operTm
TimeStamp
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
⎯ 308 ⎯
M/O/C
GRD110
M
M
M
Y(*1)
Y
Y
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRD110
M
O
O
O
O
M
M
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
ACT_ABC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
status
general
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
phsA
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
phsB
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
phsC
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
neut
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
q
Quality
ST qchg
t
TimeStamp
ST
operTm
TimeStamp
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
M/O/C
GRD110
M
O
O
O
O
M
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
N
ACD class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
status
general
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
M
Y
unknown | forward | backward | both
dirGeneral
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
M
Y
phsA
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (1)
N
unknown | forward | backward
dirPhsA
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (1)
N
phsB
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (2)
N
dirPhsB
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (2)
N
phsC
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (3)
N
dirPhsC
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (3)
N
neut
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (4)
N
dirNeut
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (4)
N
q
Quality
ST qchg
M
Y
t
TimeStamp
ST
M
Y
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
O
N
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
O
N
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLN_M
N
Services
⎯ 309 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
ACD_ABC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
status
general
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
M
Y
unknown | forward | backward | both
dirGeneral
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
M
Y
phsA
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (1)
Y
dirPhsA
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (1)
Y
phsB
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (2)
Y
dirPhsB
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (2)
Y
phsC
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (3)
Y
dirPhsC
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (3)
Y
neut
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
GC_2 (4)
N
dirNeut
ENUMERATED
ST dchg
GC_2 (4)
N
q
Quality
ST qchg
M
Y
t
TimeStamp
ST
M
Y
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
O
N
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
O
N
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLN_M
N
Services
⎯ 310 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
MV class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag
AnalogueValue
MX
O
N
mag
AnalogueValue
MX dchg
M
Y
normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |…
range
ENUMERATED
MX dchg
O
N
q
Quality
MX qchg
M
Y
t
TimeStamp
MX
M
Y
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subVal
AnalogueValue
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subQ
Quality
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
units
Unit
CF
see Annex A
O
Y
db
INT32U
CF
0 … 100 000
O
N
zeroDb
INT32U
CF
0 … 100 000
O
N
sVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
AC_SCAV
N
rangeC
RangeConfig
CF
GC_CON
N
smpRate
INT32U
CF
O
N
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
O
N
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
O
N
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLN_M
N
Services
⎯ 311 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
CMV class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal
Vector
MX
O
N
cVal
Vector
MX dchg
M
Y
normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |…
range
ENUMERATED
MX dchg
O
N
q
Quality
MX qchg
M
Y
t
TimeStamp
MX
M
Y
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subVal
Vector
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subQ
Quality
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
units
Unit
CF
see Annex A
O
Y
db
INT32U
CF
0 … 100 000
O
N
zeroDb
INT32U
CF
0 … 100 000
O
N
rangeC
RangeConfig
CF
GC_CON
N
magSVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
AC_SCAV
N
angSVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
AC_SCAV
N
angRef
ENUMERATED
CF
V | A | other …
O
N
smpRate
INT32U
CF
O
N
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
O
N
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
O
N
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLN_M
N
Services
WYE class
Attribute
Name
DataName
Data
phsA
phsB
phsC
neut
net
res
DataAttribute
angRef
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
O
N
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
CMV
CMV
CMV
CMV
CMV
CMV
ENUMERATED
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca |
CF
Vother | Aother
DC
DC
EX
EX
EX
Text
⎯ 312 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
WYE_ABCN class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
Data
phsA
CMV
phsB
CMV
phsC
CMV
neut
CMV
net
CMV
res
CMV
DataAttribute
Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca |
angRef
ENUMERATED
CF
Vother | Aother
d
VISIBLE STRING255
dU
UNICODE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
DEL class
Attribute
Name
DataName
Data
phsAB
phsBC
phsCA
DataAttribute
angRef
Attribute Type
DC
DC
EX
EX
EX
FC
Text
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
O
N
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRD110
GC_1
GC_1
GC_1
Y
Y
Y
CMV
CMV
CMV
CF
Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab |
O
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
O
UNICODE STRING255
DC
O
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLN_M
ENUMERATED
d
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
⎯ 313 ⎯
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
SEQ class
Attribute
Name
DataName
Data
c1
c2
c3
DataAttribute
seqT
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
M
Y
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
N
CMV
CMV
CMV
measured attributes
MX
pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero
ENUMERATED
CF
A|B|C|…
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
UNICODE STRING255
DC
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
ENUMERATED
phsRef
d
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
⎯ 314 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
SPC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
BOOLEAN
CO
off (FALSE) | on (TRUE)
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
origin
Originator_RO
CO, ST
ctlNum
INT8U_RO
CO, ST
0..255
SBO
VISIBLE STRING65
CO
SBOw
SBOW
CO
Oper
Oper
CO
Cancel
Cancel
CO
stVal
q
t
stSeld
subEna
subVal
subQ
subID
BOOLEAN
Quality
TimeStamp
BOOLEAN
ST
ST
ST
ST
dchg
qchg
FALSE | TRUE
dchg
substitution
SV
SV
FALSE | TRUE
SV
SV
PulseConfig
CF
CtlModels
CF
INT32U
CF
SboClasses
CF
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
UNICODE STRING255
DC
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
Quality
VISIBLE STRING64
pulseConfig
CtlModel
sboTimeout
sboClass
d
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
⎯ 315 ⎯
M/O/C
GRD110
AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
AC_CO_SBO_N_M
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
AC_CO _M
AC_CO_SBO_N_M
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
AC_ST
AC_ST
AC_ST
AC_CO_O
Y
Y
Y
N
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
AC_CO_O
M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
DPC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
M/O/C
GRD110
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
BOOLEAN
CO
off (FALSE) | on (TRUE)
AC_CO_M
N
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
AC_CO_O
N
origin
Originator
CO, ST
AC_CO_O
N
ctlNum
INT8U
CO, ST
0..255
AC_CO_O
N
stVal
CODED ENUM
ST dchg
intermediate-state | off | on |
M
Y
bad-state
q
Quality
ST qchg
M
Y
t
TimeStamp
ST
M
Y
stSeld
BOOLEAN
ST dchg
AC_CO_O
N
substitution
subEna
BOOLEAN
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subVal
CODED ENUM
SV
intermediate-state | off | on | PICS_SUBST
N
bad-state
subQ
Quality
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
subID
VISIBLE STRING64
SV
PICS_SUBST
N
pulseConfig
PulseConfig
CF
AC_CO_O
N
ctlModel
CtlModels
CF
M
Y
sboTimeout
INT32U
CF
AC_CO_O
N
sboClass
SboClasses
CF
AC_CO_O
N
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
O
N
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
O
N
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLNDA_M
N
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
AC_DLN_M
N
Services
⎯ 316 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
INC class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal
INT32
CO
operTm
TimeStamp
CO
origin
Originator
CO, ST
ctlNum
INT8U
CO, ST
0..255
SBO
VISIBLE STRING65
CO
SBOw
SBOW
CO
Oper
Oper
CO
Cancel
Cancel
CO
stVal
Q
T
stSeld
subEna
subVal
subQ
subID
INT32
Quality
TimeStamp
BOOLEAN
ST
ST
ST
ST
dchg
qchg
dchg
substitution
SV
SV
FALSE | TRUE
SV
SV
CtlModels
CF
INT32U
CF
SboClasses
CF
INT32
CF
INT32
CF
INT32U
CF
1 … (maxVal – minVal)
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
UNICODE STRING255
DC
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
BOOLEAN
INT32
Quality
VISIBLE STRING64
CtlModel
sboTimeout
sboClass
minVal
maxVal
stepSize
D
dU
cdcNs
cdcName
dataNs
Services
⎯ 317 ⎯
M/O/C
GRD110
AC_CO_M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
AC_CO_SBO_N_M
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
AC_CO _M
AC_CO_SBO_N_M
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
M
M
M
AC_CO_O
Y
Y
Y
N
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
PICS_SUBST
N
N
N
N
M
AC_CO_O
AC_CO_O
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
ING class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
setting
setVal
INT32
SP
setVal
INT32
SG, SE
minVal
INT32
CF
maxVal
INT32
CF
stepSize
INT32U
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
(*3): “ENUM” type is also used.
ASG class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
setting
setMag
AnalogueValue
SP
setMag
AnalogueValue
SG, SE
units
Unit
CF
see Annex A
sVC
ScaledValueConfig
CF
minVal
AnalogueValue
CF
maxVal
AnalogueValue
CF
stepSize
AnalogueValue
CF
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
Text
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
⎯ 318 ⎯
M/O/C
GRD110
AC_NSG_M
AC_SG_M
Y(*3)
N
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRD110
AC_NSG_M
AC_SG_M
Y
N
O
AC_SCAV
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
DPL class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
vendor
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
hwRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
swRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
serNum
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
model
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
location
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
Services
LPL class
Attribute
Attribute Type
FC
TrgOp
Value/Value Range
Name
DataName
DataAttribute
vendor
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
swRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
d
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
dU
UNICODE STRING255
DC
configRev
VISIBLE STRING255
DC
shall be included in LLN0 only;
ldNs
VISIBLE STRING255
EX
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcNs
VISIBLE STRING255
cdcName
VISIBLE STRING255
dataNs
VISIBLE STRING255
Services
EX
EX
EX
EX
⎯ 319 ⎯
M/O/C
GRD110
M
O
O
O
O
O
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
M/O/C
GRD110
M
M
M
O
AC_LN0_M
AC_LN0_EX
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
AC_DLD_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLNDA_M
AC_DLN_M
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
PICS:
Client/
Server/
GRD110
subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11
Server side (of TWO-PARTYAPPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12
Client side of (TWO-PARTYAPPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21
SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used
B22
B23
B24
SCSM: other
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31
Publisher side
B32
Subscriber side
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41
Publisher side
B42
Subscriber side
If Server side (B11) supported
M1
Logical device
M2
Logical node
M3
Data
M4
Data set
M5
Substitution
M6
Setting group control
Reporting
M7
Buffered report control
M7-1
sequence-number
M7-2
report-time-stamp
M7-3
reason-for-inclusion
M7-4
data-set-name
M7-5
data-reference
M7-6
buffer-overflow
M7-7
entryID
M7-8
BufTm
M7-9
IntgPd
M7-10
GI
Unbuffered report control
M8-1
sequence-number
M8-2
report-time-stamp
M8-3
reason-for-inclusion
M8-4
data-set-name
M8-5
data-reference
M8-6
BufTm
M8-7
IntgPd
M8-8
GI
Logging
M9
Log control
M9-1
IntgPd
M10
Log
M11
Control
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE
M12-1
entryID
⎯ 320 ⎯
-
c1
Y
c1
-
Y
N
N
-
O
O
-
Y
Y
O
O
-
N
N
c2
c3
c4
c5
O
O
c2
c3
c4
c5
O
O
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
M
O
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
O
O
Y
Remarks
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
M12-2
DataRefInc
M13
GSSE
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14
Multicast SVC
M15
Unicast SVC
M16
Time
M17
File Transfer
Server
S1
ServerDirectory
Application association
S2
Associate
S3
Abort
S4
Release
Logical device
S5
LogicalDeviceDirectory
Logical node
S6
LogicalNodeDirectory
S7
GetAllDataValues
Data
S8
GetDataValues
S9
SetDataValues
S10
GetDataDirectory
S11
GetDataDefinition
Data set
S12
GetDataSetValues
S13
SetDataSetValues
S14
CreateDataSet
S15
DeleteDataSet
S16
GetDataSetDirectory
Substitution
S17
SetDataValues
Setting group control
S18
SelectActiveSG
S19
SelectEditSG
S20
SetSGValues
S21
ConfirmEditSGValues
S22
GetSGValues
S23
GetSGCBValues
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24
Report
S24-1
data-change (dchg)
S24-2
quality-change (qchg)
S24-3
data-update (dupd)
S25
GetBRCBValues
S26
SetBRCBValues
Unbuffered report control block (BRCB)
S27
Report
S27-1
data-change (dchg)
S27-2
quality-change (qchg)
S27-3
data-update (dupd)
S28
GetURCBValues
S29
SetURCBValues
Logging
Log control block
S30
GetLCBValues
⎯ 321 ⎯
O
O
N
O
O
M
O
O
O
M
O
N
N
Y
Y
M
Y
M
M
M
M
M
M
Y
Y
Y
M
M
Y
M
O
M
M
Y
Y
M
O
O
O
M
O
M
M
Y
N
Y
Y
O
O
O
O
O
M
O
O
O
O
Y
N
N
N
Y
M
M
N
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
c6
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
M
M
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
S31
SetLCBValues
O
M
N
Log
S32
QueryLogByTime
c7
M
N
S33
QueryLogAfter
c7
M
N
S34
GetLogStatusValues
M
M
N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35
SendGOOSEMessage
c8
c8
Y
S36
GetGoReference
O
c9
N
S37
GetGOOSEElementNumber
O
c9
N
S38
GetGoCBValues
O
O
Y
S39
SetGoCBValues
O
O
Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40
SendGSSEMessage
c8
c8
N
S41
GetGsReference
O
c9
N
S42
GetGSSEElementNumber
O
c9
N
S43
GetGsCBValues
O
O
N
S44
SetGsCBValues
O
O
N
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45
SendMSVMessage
c10
c10
N
S46
GetMSVCBValues
O
O
N
S47
SetMSVCBValues
O
O
N
Unicast SVC
S48
SendUSVMessage
c10
c10
N
S49
GetUSVCBValues
O
O
N
S50
SetUSVCBValues
O
O
N
Control
S51
Select
M
O
N
S52
SelectWithValue
M
O
Y
S53
Cancel
O
O
Y
S54
Operate
M
M
Y
S55
CommandTermination
M
O
Y
S56
TimeActivatedOperate
O
O
N
File Transfer
S57
GetFile
O
M
Y
S58
SetFile
O
O
N
S59
DeleteFile
O
O
N
S60
GetFileAttributeValues
O
O
Y
Time
T1
Time resolution of internal clock
1ms
T2
Time accuracy of internal clock
1ms
T1
T3
Supported TimeStamp resolution
1ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has been
declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
⎯ 322 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
A-Profile Profile Description
shortcut
A1
Client/server A-Profile
A2
GOOSE/GSE
management A-Profile
A3
GSSE A-Profile
A4
TimeSync A-Profile
c1
c2
c3
c4
c3
c4
c3
c4
GRD110 Remarks
Y
Y
N
Y
Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC
61850-8-1.
A-Profile
shortcut
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
c1
c2
c3
c4
PICS for A-Profile support
Client
Server
F/S
F/S
c1
c1
c2
c2
Profile Description
TCP/IP T-Profile
OSI T-Profile
GOOSE/GSE T-Profile
GSSE T-Profile
TimeSync T-Profile
PICS for T-Profile support
Client
Server
F/S
F/S
c1
c1
c2
c2
c3
c3
c4
c4
o
o
Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
⎯ 323 ⎯
GRD110 Remarks
Y
N
Y
N
Y
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
InitiateRequest
MMS InitiateRequest general parameters
Client-CR
Server-CR
Base F/S Value/range Base F/S Value/range
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling
proposedMaxServOustandingCalled
initRequestDetail
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber
m
proposedParameterCBB
m
servicesSupportedCalling
m
additionalSupportedCalling
c1
additionalCbbSupportedCalling
c1
privilegeClassIdentityCalling
c1
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
m
m
m
x
x
x
InitiateRequest
1 or greater
1 or greater
shall be 2.1
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
c1
c1
c1
m
m
m
x
x
x
1 or greater
1 or greater
shall be 2.1
MMS InitiateResponse general parameters
Client-CR
Server-CR
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled
initResponseDetail
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
InitiateResponseDetail
negotiatedVersionNumber
m
negotiatedParameterCBB
m
servicesSupportedCalled
m
additionalSupportedCalled
c1
additionalCbbSupportedCalled
c1
privilegeClassIdentityCalled
c1
c1 Conditional upon Parameter CBB CSPI
m
m
m
x
x
x
1 or greater
1 or greater
shall be 2.1
⎯ 324 ⎯
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
c1
c1
c1
m
m
m
x
x
x
1 or greater
1 or greater
shall be 2.1
GRD
110
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
GRD
110
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
MMS service supported conformance table
Client-CR
MMS service supported CBB
Base F/S Value/range Base
status
o
o
o
getNameList
o
o
o
identify
o
o
m
rename
o
o
o
read
o
o
o
write
o
o
o
getVariableAccessAttributes
o
o
o
defineNamedVariable
o
o
o
defineScatteredAccess
o
i
o
getScatteredAccessAttributes
o
i
o
deleteVariableAccess
o
o
o
defineNamedVariableList
o
o
o
getNamedVariableListAttributes
o
o
o
deleteNamedVariableList
o
o
o
defineNamedType
o
i
o
getNamedTypeAttributes
o
i
o
deleteNamedType
o
i
o
input
o
i
o
output
o
i
o
takeControl
o
i
o
relinquishControl
o
i
o
defineSemaphore
o
i
o
deleteSemaphore
o
i
o
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus
o
i
o
reportSemaphoreStatus
o
i
o
initiateDownloadSequence
o
i
o
downloadSegment
o
i
o
terminateDownloadSequence
o
i
o
initiateUploadSequence
o
i
o
uploadSegment
o
i
o
terminateUploadSequence
o
i
o
requestDomainDownload
o
i
o
requestDomainUpload
o
i
o
loadDomainContent
o
i
o
storeDomainContent
o
i
o
deleteDomain
o
i
o
getDomainAttributes
o
o
o
createProgramInvocation
o
i
o
⎯ 325 ⎯
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
m
c1
m
o
c2
c3
c4
o
i
i
o
o
c5
c6
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c14
i
GRD
110
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
deleteProgramInvocation
start
stop
resume
reset
kill
getProgramInvocationAttributes
obtainFile
defineEventCondition
deleteEventCondition
getEventConditionAttributes
reportEventConditionStatus
alterEventConditionMonitoring
triggerEvent
defineEventAction
deleteEventAction
alterEventEnrollment
reportEventEnrollmentStatus
getEventEnrollmentAttributes
acknowledgeEventNotification
getAlarmSummary
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary
readJournal
writeJournal
initializeJournal
reportJournalStatus
createJournal
deleteJournal
fileOpen
fileRead
fileClose
fileRename
fileDelete
fileDirectory
unsolicitedStatus
informationReport
eventNotification
attachToEventCondition
attachToSemaphore
conclude
cancel
getDataExchangeAttributes
exchangeData
Base
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
m
o
o
o
Client-CR
F/S Value/range
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c9
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c13
o
o
i
i
i
c8
c8
c8
i
c9
c11
i
c7
i
i
i
m
o
c10
c10
⎯ 326 ⎯
Base
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
m
o
o
o
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c9
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
c13
o
c12
i
i
i
c8
c8
c8
i
c9
c11
i
c7
i
i
i
m
m
c10
c10
GRD
110
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
defineAccessControlList
getAccessControlListAttributes
reportAccessControlledObjects
deleteAccessControlList
alterAccessControl
reconfigureProgramInvocation
Base
o
o
o
o
o
o
Client-CR
F/S Value/range
c10
c10
c10
c10
c10
c10
Base
o
o
o
o
o
o
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
c10
c10
c10
c10
c10
c10
GRD
110
N
N
N
N
N
N
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if logical device or logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement or if support for the MMS
write service is declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for SetDataValues service is declared or implied.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if logical node model support is declared in ACSI basic conformance statement.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if data set support is declared in the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c6 Shall be ‘m’ if support for defineNamedVariableList is declared.
c7 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI Report or ACSI command termination is declared.
c8 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFile is declared.
c9 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI SetFile is declared.
c10 Shall not be present since MMS minor version is declared to be 1.
c11 Shall be 'm' if support for ACSI GetFileAttributeValues is declared.
c12 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI log model is declared.
c13 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter is declared.
c14 Shall be 'm' if support for the ACSI logical device model is declared.
MMS parameter CBB
STR1
STR2
NEST
VNAM
VADR
VALT
bit
TPY
VLIS
bit
bit
CEI
ACO
SEM
CSR
CSNC
CSPLC
CSPI
c1
c2
c3
c4
MMS Parameter CBB
Client-CR
Base F/S Value/range
o
o
o
o
1
1 or
gre
ater
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
c1
x
x
x
x
o
i
o
c4
o
c4
o
c4
o
c4
o
c4
o
c4
Base
o
o
1
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
c1
o
c2
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI logical node model support declared.
Shall be five(5) or greater if ACSI logical node model support is declared.
Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI data set, reporting, GOOSE, or logging model support is declared.
Shall not be present. Receiving implementations shall assume not supported.
⎯ 327 ⎯
c1
o
c1
x
o
c3
x
x
i
c4
c4
c4
c4
c4
c4
GRD
110
Y
N
Y(10
)
Y
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
GetNameList
Request
ObjectClass
ObjectScope
DomainName
ContinueAfter
Response+
List Of Identifier
MoreFollows
ResponseError Type
GetNameList conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
GRD
110
m
m
o
o
m
m
o
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
Y
Y
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
m
m
m
m
Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an
MMS Reject shall be issued.
AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement
Not applicable.
VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
VariableAccessSpecification
listOfVariable
o
o
o
c1
variableSpecification
o
o
o
c1
alternateAccess
o
o
o
c1
variableListName
o
o
o
c2
GRD
110
Y
Y
Y
Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for Logical Node Model is declared.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI support for ACSI DataSets, reporting, or logging is declared.
VariableSpecification conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
VariableSpecification
name
o
o
o
m
address
o
o
o
i
variableDescription
o
o
o
i
scatteredAccessDescription
o
x
o
x
invalidated
o
x
o
x
Read
Request
specificationWithResult
variableAccessSpecification
Response
listOfAccessResult
Read conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
GRD
110
Y
N
N
N
N
GRD
110
o
m
o
m
o
m
m
m
Y
Y
o
m
o
m
o
m
m
m
Y
Y
⎯ 328 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Write conformance statement
Client-CR
Write
Request
listOfData
Response
failure
success
GRD
110
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
InformationReport conformance statement
Client-CR
InformationReport
Request
listOfAccessResult
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
m
m
m
m
m
m
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
m
m
GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
GetVariableAccessAttributes
Request
name
o
o
m
m
address
o
o
m
x
Response
mmsDeletable
m
m
m
m
address
o
x
o
x
typeSpecification
m
m
m
m
GRD
110
Y
Y
GRD
110
Y
N
Y
N
Y
DefineNamedVariableList conformance statement
Not applicable.
GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
GetNamedVariableListAttributes
Request
ObjectName
m
m
m
m
Response
mmsDeletable
m
m
m
m
listOfVariable
m
m
m
m
variableSpecification
m
m
m
m
alternateAccess
o
m
o
i
DeleteNamedVariableList conformance statement
Not applicable.
⎯ 329 ⎯
GRD
110
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
ReadJournal conformance statement
Not applicable.
JournalEntry conformance statement
Not applicable.
InitializeJournal conformance statement
Not applicable.
FileDirectory
Request
filespecification
continueAfter
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry
MoreFollows
FileOpen
Request
filename
initialPosition
Response+
frsmID
fileAttributes
FileRead
Request
frsmID
Response+
fileData
MoreFollows
FileDirectory conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
GRD
110
o
o
o
o
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
FileOpen conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
GRD
110
m
o
m
o
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
FileRead conformance statement
Client-CR
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
GRD
110
m
m
m
m
Y
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
Y
Y
⎯ 330 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
FileClose
Request
frsmID
Response+
GOOSE Services
SendGOOSEMessage
GetGoReference
GetGOOSEElementNumber
GetGoCBValues
SetGoCBValues
GSENotSupported
GOOSE Control Block (GoCB)
FileClose conformance statement
Client-CR
m
m
m
m
m
m
Server-CR
F/S Value/range
m
m
GOOSE conformance statement
Subscriber
Publisher
Value/comment
c1
c1
m
m
o
c3
o
c4
o
o
o
o
c2
c5
o
o
Y
Y
GRD110
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support is declared within ACSI basic conformance statement.
c2 Shall be ‘m’ if ACSI basic conformance support for either GetGoReference or GetGOOSEElementNumber is
declared.
c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGoReference is declared.
c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber.
c5 Shall be ‘m’ if no support for ACSI basic conformance of GetGOOSEElementNumber is declared.
GSSE conformance statement
Not applicable.
⎯ 331 ⎯
GRD
110
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
⎯ 332 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix O
Inverse Time Characteristics
⎯ 333 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI)
(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)
100
10
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
10
TMS
1.5
1.
TMS
1.5
1
1.0
0.5
0.5
1
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
Normal Inverse
1
10
Very Inverse
⎯ 334 ⎯
100
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)
1000
100
UK Inverse Curves (LTI)
10
100
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
1000
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
TMS
1.5
10
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.2
1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.01
1
10
100
Extremely Inverse
1
10
Long Time Inverse
⎯ 335 ⎯
100
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IEEE Inverse Curves (MI)
IEEE Inverse Curves (VI)
10
10
Operating Time (s)
100
Operating Time (s)
100
TMS
1.5
1
1.0
0.5
TM
1
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.2
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.01
1
10
100
Moderately Inverse
1
10
Very Inverse
⎯ 336 ⎯
100
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
IEEE Inverse Curves (EI)
100
Operating Time (s)
10
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.01
1
10
100
Extremely Inverse
⎯ 337 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
US Inverse Curves (CO8)
US Inverse Curves (CO2)
10
100
10
1
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
TMS
1
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.5
0.1
1.0
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01
0.01
1
10
100
1
CO8 Inverse
10
CO2 Short Time Inverse
⎯ 338 ⎯
100
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Appendix P
Ordering
⎯ 339 ⎯
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Ordering
GRD110
Type:
Overcurrent Relay
Model:
-Model 110: Earth fault and sensitive earth fault
with autoreclose function
-Model 400: Three phase and earth fault
-Model 420: Three phase, earth and sensitive earth fault
GRD110
110
400
420
Rating:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc
1A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 110V/125Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 110V/125Vdc
1A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc
1A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 220V/250Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 220V/250Vdc
1A, 50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
1A, 60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc
1A, 50Hz, 24/30Vdc
1A, 60Hz, 24/30Vdc
5A, 50Hz, 24/30Vdc
5A, 60Hz, 24/30Vdc
Communications:
For IEC60870-5-103
RS485
RS485
Fibre optic
Fibre optic
For IEC61850 / RSM100
100BASE-TX
100BASE-FX
100BASE-TX
100BASE-FX
A
B
D
E
Miscellaneous:
0
None
⎯ 340 ⎯
D
0
6 F 2 S 0 9 0 3
Version-up Records
Version
No.
0.0
0.1
Date
Aug. 25, 2010
May 26, 2011
Revised Section
-Appendix
Contents
First issue
Modified Tech. data
⎯ 341 ⎯